Home

Honeywell ST3000 Users manual, 34-ST-25-15

1. 48 FIGURE 21 BUS WITH SPURS WIRING a aan A EEA Saee E EEES eret eren 49 FIGURE 22 FIELDBUS NETWORK USING TREE WIRING SCHEME 49 FIGURE 23 ST 3000 TRANSMITTER TERMINAL BLOCKS esee nennen ener ener 52 FIGURE 24 WRITE PROTECT JUMPER LOCATION ON TRANSDUCER 68 FIGURE 25 SMART METER rennen nete enne tenete trente tenentes 74 FIGURE 26 FBAP BLOCK DIAGRAM dH EE RE RUE HG ERR 83 FIGURE 27 TRANSDUCER BLOCK DIAGRAM eene enne trennen nente nenne 92 FIGURE 28 AT BLOCK DIAGRAM RIO CE RR REOR RT RERO 104 FIGURE 29 PID CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM eet e itte e pet e etes 112 FIGURE 30 DISASSEMBLY OF DP TRANSMITTER PROCESS HEADS FROM METER BODY 170 FIGURE 32 MAJOR ST 3000 FF SMART TRANSMITTER PARTS REFERENCE 219 FIGURE 33 ST 3000 MOUNTING BRACKET PARTS REFERENCE sess rennes 220 FIGURE 34 SERIES 100 AND 900 ELECTRONICS HOUSING ELECTRONICS METER END 221 FIGURE 35 SERIES 100 AND 900 ELECTRONICS HOUSING TERMINAL BLOCK END 221 FIGURE 36 SERIES 100 AND SERIES 900 DP METER BODY FOR MODELS STD924 amp STD930 AND L AND STDO974 iecore dei 223 FIGURE 37 SERIES 900 DP METER BODY F
2. AMam es Jof Continued on next page 110 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 7 Function Block Continued Table 42 PID Control Function Block Parameters continued Honeywell Parameters Data Type Structure Default Value PID FORM Unsigned8 Ideal 1 67 Unsigned8 E GaN NUN s o m oncom Fee 5 ERRORABS m wee 5 uewem Honeywell defined The Honeywell defined parameters provide a robust PID algorithm A PID Parameters description of these parameters is in Table 43 Table 44 Honeywell PID Parameters Description Parameter Contents PID FORM Configuration parameter specifies the IDEAL or ROBUST PID equation to be used IDEAL PID default Non Interactive form of a three mode control equation that provides Proportional Integral and Derivative control action Linear and non linear gain parameters are available ROBUST PID The same as Ideal PID Additionally the equation supports a user configurable lag filter applied to calculated output value See OUT LAG parameter Linear and non linear gain parameters are available ALGO TYPE Configuration parameter specifies algorithm type which can be A B or C Type A equation where Proportional Integral and Derivative act on ERROR Type B equation where Proporti
3. I N enor asm o oum sopor ow our 1 I sae O wno 1 2 mew fsf Ea sae prem View List for PID Control Function Block Parameters maps mee f f f 2 5 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 129 8 10 View Objects Continued Table 55 View List for PID Control Function Block Parameters continued Wame View Views Views wow 4 uas 1 ACK OPTION d 4 farmers O 4 ar 4s o 1 a 5 uw 1 a 9 por O 5 frou J 5 orom a e warn O wam 0 f a 5 wiom 5 vom i o AJN Al BR ol KR oy BR Oo A Honeywell Parameters Nam 130 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 11 A Alert Objects D
4. 5 om pare Restore caus pare cear 5 22 m 3 s 9 Notes A View object can have a maximum of 123 octets Please read CAUTION about these parameters on page 88 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 127 8 10 View Objects Continued Table 55 View List for AI Function Block Parameters tag DESC STRATEGY ALERT KEY MODEBLK 4 BLOCK ERR 2 SIMULATE xD scare OULSCAE 12 GRANTDENY io opts o 14 SrATUSOPTS 15 CHANNEL 5 ALARM SUM 8 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 7 HIPRI 09 20 Ea EN 24 aaa 26 28 NNI 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Name View2 Views 1 2 1 ack option aarm HYS o HH PRI View4 2 Honeywell Parameters 37 38 Honeywell Diagnostic Parameters 39 40 128 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 10 View Objects Continued Table 56 MODE BLK OU OUT SCALE GRANT DENY STATUS OPTS og FF VAL 7 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 IE ND Cen mock 2 peo
5. sess 64 This section explains the tasks to establish communications configure and check operation of the ST 3000 FF Transmitter for the process application An overview is given of the configuration tasks using the NI FBUS Configurator application as an example Detailed information on using your configurator application is found in the user manual supplied with the software Before proceeding with the tasks in this section it is assumed that the ST 3000 FF transmitter has been installed and wired correctly It also assumes that you are somewhat familiar with using a fieldbus configuration application such as the NI FBUS Configurator If the transmitter has not been installed and wired or if you are not familiar with device configuration and or you do not know if the transmitter is configured please read the other sections of this manual before configuring your transmitter 58 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 6 2 ST 3000 FF Communications Communications and Control Configuration Applications All communications with the ST 3000 FF is through an operator station or host computer running supervisory control and monitoring applications These applications provide the operator interface to fieldbus devices on the fieldbus network Configuration of the transmitter for your process application also is performed through the operator interface operator station o
6. 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Figure 39 Series 900 Dual Head GP Meter Bodies Tg Table 98 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 39 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without heads GP models 1 model number from nameplate K1 30757506 001 Head bolts carbon steel 3 8 inch 4 Kit includes Bolts Nuts 30757507 001 Head bolts stainless steel NACE 3 8 inch 4 Kit includes Bolts Nuts 30757507 002 Process Head Bolting 3 8 UNC 316 SS Non NACE 4 Kit Includes Process Head Bolts and Nuts K2 30757501 001 Replacement heads carbon steel Kit includes Head with side vents Head dummy CS Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent Plug Gasket 30757501 002 Replacement heads carbon steel Kit includes Head without side vents Head dummy CS Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Bushings Vent Plug Gasket 30757502 001 Replacement heads stainless steel Kit includes Heads with side vents Head dummy SS Head gaskets Teflon head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets 30757502 002 Replacement heads stainless steel Kit includes Heads without side vents Head dummy SS Head gaskets Teflon head gaskets Viton Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets 30756941 005 Stainless steel blind reference head HR option K3 30757505 0011 Process head gasket kit Kit includes 6 Teflon head gaskets 30757 100 001 6 Teflon flange adapter gaskets 30679622 001
7. 207 TABLE 84 AREAS OF DEVICE MEMORY WHERE DATA IS STORED eee 208 TABLE 85 BLOCK ERR PARAMETERBIT 209 TABLE 86 ERROR DETAIL PARAMETER ENUMERATION eene 210 TABLE 87 SUMMARY OF CONFIGURATION ERRORS eren ene 211 TABEES88 AUBEOCK PARAMBTEBS once eene tite re eee 214 TABLE 89 PID FUNCTION BLOCK PARAMETERS eese 000000000000 215 TABLE 91 SIMULATION MODE TRUTH 000000000000 217 TABLE 92 ST 3000 MOUNTING BRACKETS PARTS REFERENCE eere 220 TABLE 93 PARTS IDENTIFICATION FOR CALLOUTS IN FIGURES 34 AND 35 222 TABLE 94 PARTS IDENTIFICATION FOR CALLOUTS IN FIGURE 36 sse 224 TABLE 95 PARTS IDENTIFICATION FOR CALLOUTS IN FIGURE 37 eere eene 227 TABLE 96 PARTS IDENTIFICATION FOR CALLOUTS IN FIGURE 38 eee 228 TABLE97 REPLACEMENT GP AND AP PROCESS HEAD PART NUMBERS FOR NARROW PROFILE METER BODY hee int unti 229 TABLE 98 PARTS IDENTIFICATION FOR CALLOUTS IN FIGURE 39 eere eren 230 TABLE 99 PARTS IDENTIFICATION FOR CALLOUTS IN FIGURE 40 231 TABLE 100 PARTS IDENTIFICATION FOR CALLOUTS IN FIGURE 41 eee 232 xii ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 TABLE 101 PARTS IDEN
8. 51204983 004 Flange adapter kit NPT Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 005 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 150 w st stl bolts 51204983 006 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 019 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 150 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 020 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 150 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 007 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts 51204983 008 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain Continued on next page July 201 1 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 235 12 1 Replacement Parts Continued Table 102 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 43 continued Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 51204983 013 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 014 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 300 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 023 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 300 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 024 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 300 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 015 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT Hastelloy 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 016 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT Hastelloy 300 w st
9. Continued on next page 218 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Figure 32 STD110 STD120 STD125 STD130 STD170 STD824 510930 STDS 4 Major ST 3000 FF Smart Transmitter Parts Reference ST 3000 Release 300 FF Continued on next page Electronic Housing Assembly See Figures 34 and 35 Meter Bodies Single Head See GP Models Figure STG140 38 STG944 STG170 38 STGS 74 STG180 38 Single Head See AP Models Figure STA122 38 STA140 38 STA322 38 STA940 38 Remate Diaphragm Seal Models STR12D STR13D STR14A STR93D High Temperature See STG14T 43 LGP Models STR14G STR1I7G STRI4G Attention No replacement meter bod y is available for Remote Diaphragm Seal Models STG14L STG17L STG18L STG84L STGS7L STG98L STAT 21 STA82L STAT 4L STAS4L STAT L STAS L Flush Mount GP Models Figure STG93P STF IAT 43 41 2 L See July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 219 12 1 Figure 33 Replacement Parts Continued ST 3000 Mounting Bracket Parts Reference 1 Angle 2 Mounting Bracket Flat Mounting Bracket Table 92 ST 3000 Mounting Brackets Parts Reference Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 30752770 003 Angle Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush mount 2 30752770 004 Ang
10. 208 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 11 7 Device Diagnostics Continued Table 85 BLOCK ERR ParameterBit Mapping BLOCK ERR Bit Value or Message Description Block configuration error Invalid parameter value in block See Clearing Block configuration Errors Simulate parameter active The SIMULATE parameter is being used as the input to the Al block This occurs if the simulate jumper is set to Y on the electronics board and the ENABLE DISABLE field of the SIMULATE parameter is set to 2 See Subsection 11 10 also Not used Input failure process variable has Sensor failure BAD status Memory failure Block database DB error or p e ROM failure Resource block only Lost static data Block Non Volatile NV memory failure Stack NV memory failure Link or Trend objects NV memory failure Lost NV data EEPROM write to block DB failed EEPROM write to Stack DB failed Resource block only EEPROM write to Link or Trend DB failed Resource block only Readback check failed Communication failure to serial EEPROM Checksum error Resource block only Out of service Out of Service The block s actual mode is O S most significant bit MSB Depending on the fieldbus interface application device operating status and parameter values may appear as text messages The text in the table is typical of values or messages seen when using the NI FBUS configurator Continued on next
11. model STD110 only 30753908 113 Process head assembly kit st steel head model STD110 only 30753908 114 Process head assembly kit carbon steel DIN head model STD110 only 30753908 115 Process head assembly kit st steel DIN head model STD110 only K1 Pipe plug 2 K2 Vent plug 1 K3 Vent bushing 1 K6 Gasket Viton process head 1 K11 Gasket PTFE flange adapter 1 K5 Process head 1 Figure 37 Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 amp STD930 A B E F and J Continued on next page 226 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Table 95 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 37 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without heads 1 model number from nameplate K1 30757506 001 Head bolts carbon steel 4 Kit includes Bolts Nuts 30757507 001 Head bolts stainless steel NACE 4 Kit includes Bolts Nuts 30757507 002 Process Head Bolting 3 8 UNC 316 SS Non NACE 4 Kit Includes Process Head Bolts and Nuts K2 30757147 0011 Replacement heads carbon steel Kit includes Heads with side vents Head gaskets Teflon head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets 30757147 002 Replacement heads carbon steel Kit includes Heads without side vents Head gaskets Teflon head gaskets Viton Bushings Vent p
12. 30753908 013 Process head assembly kit st steel head model STD110 only 30753908 014 Process head assembly kit carbon steel DIN head model STD110 only 30753908 015 Process head assembly kit st steel DIN head model STD110 only K1 Pipe plug 2 K2 Vent plug 1 K3 Vent bushing 1 K5 Process head 1 K6 Gasket PTFE process head 1 K11 Gasket PTFE optional flange adapter 1 Continued on next page July 201 1 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 225 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Table 94 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 36 continued Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit Process Head Kits one head with Viton head gasket 30753908 101 Process head assembly kit Hastelloy C head 30753908 102 Process head assembly kit Hastelloy C DIN head 30753908 103 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head with side vent drain 30753908 104 Process head assembly kit st steel head with side vent drain 30753908 105 Process head assembly kit Monel head 30753908 109 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head without side vent drain 30753908 110 Process head assembly kit stainless steel head without side vent drain 30753908 111 Process head assembly kit stainless steel DIN head without side vent drain 30753908 112 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head
13. 4 Read SENSOR TEMP Should Report information to Honeywell Analog Input block mode Read MODE BLK ACTUAL of Al block Set MODE BLK TARGET to is OOS Auto Read WRITE LOCK parameter in 1 Change Write Protect jumper resource block Check if device is in to W position See Write Protect mode Subsection 6 6 If WRITE LOCK Locked 2 Reset the device Cycle power to transmitter or write Processor to RESTART parameter in Resource block Read CHANNEL parameter If CHANNEL 1 then read PRIMARY VALUE RANGE UNITS INDEX should contain the same units as XD SCALE UNITS in the Al block If CHANNEL 2 then XD SCALE UNITS and OUT SCALE UNITS should 7 same units When L TYPE Direct XD SCALE and OUT SCALE should contain the same range values EU 0 and EU 100 200 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 11 3 Device Troubleshooting Continued Continued on next page Non Functioning Blocks Continued Table 79 Device Troubleshooting Table C continued Symptom Device output is not updating Analog Input block mode is O S e Al block is not initialized Analog Input block is not running Check the following parameters ALERT KEY Should 0 e CHANNEL Should 0 e TYPE Should Uninitialized Read parameters e SIMULATE ENABLE_DISABLE Should Disable Read parameters e PV e FIELD VAL Both parameter should be active and
14. 4616821 0 Process gt b 7 9440 Za 3 28 Alarms Periodic Diagnostics 005 Aul Others Calibration Process Al Methods rends Others Methods Parameter TAG DESC MODE TARGET Auto ACTUAL OO ou PERMITTED Auto 1005 NORMAL Auto gi Write Changes Read All The Parameter items are contained in the first 5 selections from Process through Calibration These give read write access to all parameters were previously presented in Section 8 5 Transducer Block A Methods item is listed after the parameter items The methods include data information and automated calibration procedures These are shown below t ST 4616821 XD 4616821 ST3000TB Apply Values MAEA xD 4616821 Process Alarms TU PEE Others Calibration Process Methods Show Block Info Two Point Calibration Diagnostics gt Parameter ST REV Restore Calibration Clear Calibration 9 STRATEGY Calibrate Zero El 9 UPDATE EVT UNACKNOWLEDGED UPDATE_STATE TIME_STAMP STATIC_REVISION RELATIVE INDIES Write Changes Read All July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 157 8 21 Transducer Block Methods Continued The Show Block Method Info details information for e Present Static Pressure Maximum Static Pressure e Present meter body Sensor Temperature e Maximum meter body Sensor Temperature e Minimum meter body Sensor Temperature e Stress M
15. Action 5 Remove O ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle brush and suitable solvent Replace O ring e We recommend that you install new O ring whenever a process head is removed for cleaning e The process head for a GP or AP transmitter with single head design has two O ring grooves A large one which is 2 in 50 8 mm in diameter and a small one which is 1 3 in 33 mm in diameter as shown in the following illustration For high pressure applications be sure to use a small O ring in the smaller inner groove On other models of GP or AP transmitters use a large O ring in the larger outer groove Never use both O rings together Larger O ring Smaller O ring groove for groove for lower pressure high pressure applications applications BN a GP AP Process Head e For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual head design see detail illustration for differential pressure transmitters in step 8 Coat threads on process head bolts with anti seize compound such as Neverseize or equivalent Continued on next page 178 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 9 5 Replacing Meter Body Continued Procedure continued Table 68 Replacing Meter Body Only continued Step Action 8 Carefully assemble process head or heads and bolts to new center section Finger tighten nuts Typical Series 100 DP Transmitter
16. Column Title Attribute E The number of octets Valid Range Range of valid values the parameter is restricted to for use in the function block For bit strings 0 zero is always valid as the state of a bit and is the inverse of the described value For enumeration 0 zero means that the value is invalid This is required for initialization of an unconfigured block Plus or minus infinity INF or INF may be included in the valid range to indicate that it is permissible to use them to turn off a limit comparison such as an alarm limit Initial Value The default value inserted when the device is restarted with defaults All limits are set to plus or minus infinity INF or INF which is the same as no limit All dynamic values are initialized to zero See RESTART parameter Perm Defines the setting of the GRANT DENY parameter that allows write access to Permission the parameter for interface devices that obey this parameter Indicates the lowest priority target mode required to allow a change to the parameter The actual mode must match the target mode so that the block is not in another mode than that chosen by the operator Scaling changes are protected by mode because the block may be using scaling to calculate its output DD handling for e Positive e Ordered and e Read only NOTE For parameters that are inputs If it is linked it is read only If it is not linked it can be written to Range Check Flag to chec
17. Contents SECTION 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 1 Introduction 11 2 Overview 11 3 Device Troubleshooting 11 4 Transmitter Faults 11 5 Non Critical Fault Summary 11 6 Critical Fault Summary 11 7 Device Diagnostics 11 8 Block Configuration Errors 11 9 Clearing Block Configuration Errors 11 10 Simulation Mode SECTION 12 PARTS LIST 12 1 Replacement Parts SECTION 13 REFERENCE DRAWINGS 13 1 Wiring Diagrams 13 2 Dimension Drawings APPENDIX A HAZARDOUS AREA CLASSIFICATIONS A 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations 2 International Electrotechnical Commission Classification of Hazardous Locations Enclosure Ratings AA Table III Options Reference APPENDIX B SAMPLE CONFIGURATION RECORD APPENDIX C FREEZE PROTECTION OF TRANSMITTERS C 1 Possible Solutions Methods 195 195 196 197 203 206 207 208 211 214 216 218 218 238 238 239 244 244 253 258 260 263 277 277 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide Contents ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Tables TABLE 1 ADVANCED DIAGNOSTICS AVAILABILITY eese en nennen enne tenens 14 TABLE 2 COMPONENTS REQUIRED FOR ST 3000 FF INSTALLATION eere eee 16 TABLE 3 INSTALLATION OPERATION TASK SUMMARY enne nenne 18 TABLE 4 OFF LINE CONFIGURATION WIRING PROCEDURE eene nennen nnne ennt enne
18. 0x0201 REVISION_ARRAY 0x0014 REVISION_ARRAY 0x0101 48 BLOCK_TEST BLOCK_TEST 0x00 Constantly increases BLOCK_TEST 0x00 BLOCK_TEST 0x00 BLOCK_TEST 0x00 BLOCK_TEST 0x00 BLOCK_TEST 0x00 BLOCK_TEST 0x00 BLOCK_TEST 0x00 49 ERROR_DETAIL ERROR_DETAIL 0x0000 ERROR_DETAIL 0x0000 ERROR_DETAIL 0x0000 AUX_FEATURES INSTALL DATE 06 01 09 MM DD YY HH MM SS Capture Date of Installation TIME IN SERVICE Constantly Increases per Minute POWER CYCLES 0x0004 Counts Power Cycles POWER CYCLES DATE 06 01 09 MM DD YY HH MM SS Captured Date of Occurence VOLTAGE 23 603 Current Terminal Voltage VOLTAGE MIN 22 502 Minimum Terminal Voltage VOLTAGE MIN DATE 06 01 09 MM DD YY HH MM SS Captured Date of Occurrence 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 265 58 EL TEMPERATURE 31 196 Present Electronics Temperature 59 EL TEMP OVER RNG CTR Count of Occurrence 60 EL TEMP OVER RNG DATE 06 01 09 MM DD YY HH MM SS Captured Date of Occurrence 61 EL TEMP UNDER RNG Count of Occurrence 62 EL TEMP UNDER RNG DATE 06 01 09 MM DD YY HH MM SS Captured Date of Occurrence 63 EL TEMP 34 22 Captured Max Value 64 EL TEMP MIN 23 636 Captured Min Value 65 MSG KEY NUMBER STF128 Model Selection Guide Key Number 66 MSG METER BODY Model Selection Guide Meter Body Number
19. 17 Return transmitter to service 180 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 9 6 Code Download Code Download Utility A code download may be recommended to upgrade the transmitter firmware A download utility program is used to perform the upgrade A code download also updates other files necessary for proper operation specifically new versions of the Standard Dictionary and Device Description files are loaded on the host computer These files are compatible with the new code Table 69 outlines the procedure for code download on a ST 3000 FF transmitter using the Honeywell FF Products Download Application A code download can be performed on an active live control loop Prepare the control loop by setting the final control device to a safe state The transmitter will be off line for about 30 minutes When the download is complete the transmitter will revert to default settings so before you download save the present configuration Table 69 Code Download Procedure Step Action Save the current FBAP configuration of the device that you are going to perform a code download Start NIFB exe and then DLOAD exe the Honeywell download application Select a device using the Refresh button Enter the code file name including path or use the Browse button Press the Download button to start the download After 6 to 8 minutes a message bo
20. 2 93 TABLE 38 AI FUNCTION BLOCK PARAMETER LIST esses enne enne nennen eterne enne nnne 101 TABLE 39 AI BLOCK PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS eese enne ennt enne enne 102 TABLE 40 TRANSDUCER BLOCK 103 47 JALBLOCK PARAMETERS Een heaton Garces ah aon tin ETE 105 TABLE 42 AI BLOCK MODE RESTRICTED PARAMETERS sees enne 108 TABLE 43 PID CONTROL FUNCTION BLOCK PARAMETERS eerte ennt enne 109 TABLE 44 HONEYWELL PID PARAMETERS 2 40420 2 22 0 restent entes 111 TABLE 45 PID TUNING PARAMETER 8 11 2 00000000000000000000000000000555 508 114 TABLE 46 PID BLOCK MODE RESTRICTED PARAMETERS esee eene enne enne enne 115 TABLE 47 TABLE DESCRIPTION FOR BLOCK PARAMETER 5 0 116 TABLE 48 TRANSDUCER BLOCK PARAMETER 5 1 00 20 nennen nennen enne ens 118 TABLE 49 RESOURCE BLOCK PARAMETER 5 120 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide xi TABLE 50 ANALOG INPUT FUNCTION BLOCK PARAMETER SUMMARY 0 120 TABLE 51 PID FUNCTION BLOCK PARAMETER 5 120 TABLE 52 LINK OBJECTS DEFINED FOR ST 3000 FF sess ener 122 TABL
21. Continued on next page 172 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 94 Replacing Transmitter Electronics Continued Procedure continued Table 67 Replacing Smart Meter and Electronics Module continued Step Transmitter Mounting Bracket End Caps Action Loosen end cap lock screw using the Allen key and unscrew end cap from electronics side of housing See figure for exploded view of transmitter components PWA and Flex Tape Connector Local Smart Meter Connector Cable If transmitter is equipped with a local smart meter Carefully turn smart meter counterclockwise to disconnect it from electronics module We recommend that you use a ground strap or ionizer when handling the electronics module since electrostatic discharges can damage certain circuit components Note orientation of electronics module in housing Move the meter to the side and loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull the electronics module out of the housing Smart Meter Electronics Module Retaining Mounting Screws Bracket Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 173 94 Replacing Transmitter Electronics Continued Procedure continued Table 67 Replacing Smart Meter and Electronics Module continued Step Action 6 Note routing of meter cable to mounting brac
22. e The LCD will turn black at some temperature between 80 to 90 C 176 194 F rendering the display unreadable This effect is only temporary and normally occurs at 90 C 194 F e At low temperatures the update rate of the display is lengthened to 1 5 seconds due to the slower response time of the display At 20 C 4 F the display becomes unreadable due to slow response ofthe LCD This is also only temporary and normal readability will return when temperature returns above 20 C 4 F 28 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Section 5 Transmitter Installation 5 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section Topic See Page Introduction iue ee e e eee 27 5 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter sees 28 5 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter essen 38 5 4 Wiring ST 3000 FF Transmitter sese 43 5 5 Power up Transmitter esses eee 53 About this Section This section provides information about the mechanical and electrical installation of the ST 3000 FF transmitter It includes procedures for mounting piping and wiring the transmitter for operation July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 29 5 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Summary You can mount all transmitter models except flush mount models and those with integral flanges to a 2
23. 1200 600 2 600 600 1 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 97 8 5 Transducer Block Continued Step3 Configure the transducer block parameters LEVEL and TANK RANGE So LEVEL COEFF is configured with the coefficients calculated above in Step 2 TANK RANGE may be configured as described below where TANK RANGE EU 0 actual pressure when tank is empty Pempty TANK RANGE EU 100 actual pressure when tank is full Pan TANK RANGE UNITS_INDEX pressure units used Configuring TANK RANGE EU 0 The lower range pressure measurement when tank is empty 15 configured in TANK RANGE EU 0 and can be either of the following e Actual measured pressure when tank is empty or e 2 5 1 Where H2 Height of fixed reference leg vertical height between upper and lower tank connections in units configured in SENSOR RANGE subindex 3 units index S Specific gravity of fill fluid e g Sr of silicon DC200 0 94 Configuring TANK RANGE EU 100 The upper range pressure measurement when tank is full is configured in TANK RANGE EU 100 and can be either of the following Actual measured pressure when tank is full or e Hle SL Where Height of variable head in units configured in SENSOR RANGE subindex 3 units index S Specific gravity of measured liquid e g S of water at 60 F is 1 00 Continued on next pag
24. Electronics fault 3 and 4 Write 4 or processor to RESTART 4 Suspect input parameter of resource block If failure is still present replace transmitter electronics module 5 Sensor over temperature Reduce temperature at sensor temperature is greater than 125 sensor Take steps to C 257 F insulate meter body from temperature source Bad alarm status Transducer board has stopped Write 4 or processor to device failure communicating with the stack board RESTART parameter of resource block If failure is still present replace transmitter electronics module BLOCK_ALM of the Check BLOCK_ERR for status See Subsection 11 7 for Transducer Block is active message details of BLOCK_ERR parameter BLOCK_ALM of the Resource Check BLOCK_ERR for status See Subsection 11 7 for Block is active message details of BLOCK_ERR parameter July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 207 11 7 Device Diagnostics ST 3000 FF Memory Background Diagnostics BLOCK ERR parameter Background Diagnostics Execution BLOCK TEST parameter The ST 3000 FF contains a number of areas of memory An EEPROM provides a non volatile memory area for static and non volatile parameter values The transmitter also contains areas of RAM and ROM Block objects Resource Transducer and Function blocks the communications stack and other device objects each have a designated area of
25. Fieldbus Devices Continued on next page 48 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 5 4 Wiring ST 3000 FF Transmitter Continued Bus with Spurs In this scheme field devices are connected to a bus by a length of Wiring fieldbus cable called a spur or drop The spur can vary in length from 1 meter 3 28 ft to 120 m 394 ft Figure 21 shows devices and spurs connected to a bus segment Figure 21 Bus with Spurs Wiring To Control System Terminator lec Power Conditioner Fieldbus Interface 69 Fieldbus Devices Tree Wiring Scheme this scheme field devices are connected to a single fieldbus segment via a spur cable to a common junction block terminal or marshalling panel This scheme is practical if devices on the segment are well separated but in the general area of the same junction block Figure 22 shows the tree wiring scheme Figure 22 Fieldbus Network using Tree Wiring Scheme To Control System Junction Block Terminator lec Power Conditioner Fieldbus Interface Q Fieldbus Devices July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 49 5 4 Wiring ST 3000 FF Transmitter Continued Fieldbus Network Limitations Fieldbus Cable Types Table 17 A number of factors limit the size of a fieldbus network 1 The cable type used in the wiring system limits the length of a network segment See Fieldbus Cable Types 2
26. Good_NonCascade UnacknowledgedBlockAlarm NotLimited VALUE 58 3553 11 CALC_VAL STATUS Bad NonSpecific NotLimited VALUE 0 12 SENSOR_TEMP 20 2925 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 267 Transducer Block Continued 13 SENSOR TEMP UNIT C Index Parameter mnemonic Value 14 LEVEL COEFF LEVEL COEFF 0 LEVEL COEFF 0 LEVEL COEFF 0 LEVEL COEFF 0 LEVEL COEFF 0 LEVEL COEFF 0 15 PRIMARY VALUE RANGE EU 100 400 EU 0 0 UNITS INDEX inH2O 4 C DECIMAL 0x00 CAL NONE CAL POINT HI 400 CAL POINT LO 0 CAL STATUS Success 16 17 18 19 2 o 5 20 CAL SOURCE Factory 21 CAL UNIT inH20 4 C 22 XD DIAG DETAIL 0x0000 23 SENSOR RANGE EU 100 400 EU 0 R 0 UNITS INDEX R inH20 4 C DECIMAL_R 0x00 24 SENSOR_SN 0x40006363 25 SENSOR_MAX_SP 3000 26 SENSOR_MAX_OVP 3000 27 TANK_RANGE EU_100 400 EU 0 0 UNITS INDEX inH2O 4 C DECIMAL 0x00 28 BLOCK TEST BLOCK TEST Oxaf Constantly increases BLOCK TEST 0x00 BLOCK TEST 0x00 BLOCK TEST 0x00 BLOCK TEST 0x00 BLOCK TEST 0x00 BLOCK TEST 0x00 BLOCK TEST 0x00 29 PV OVER RNG CTR 0 Count of Occurrence 30 PV OVER RNG DATE 01 01 72 00 00 00 Captured Date of Occurence 31 PV UNDER RNG CTR 0 Count of Occurrence 32 PV UNDER RNG DATE 01 01 72 00 00 00 Captured Date of Occurence 33 TEMP OVER RNG CTR 0 Co
27. If recalibration is not possible the transmitter can be returned to default calibration by following the procedure in Section 10 3 Clear Calibration Do not use CAL RESTORE for recalibration 19 Return transmitter to service 176 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 9 5 Replacing Meter Body Procedure You can replace the complete meter body including process heads or only the meter body on selected DP GP and AP transmitters by using the existing process head s Use the procedure in Table 68 to install a meter body only Table 68 Replacing Meter Body Only Step Action 1 Complete first 8 Steps in Table 67 as applicable to remove electronics module Use 4 mm size hex wrench to completely loosen set screw outside housing lt q Set Screw e e 7 M Process Head Process Head Meter Body Carefully turn complete meter body counterclockwise to unscrew it from electronics housing Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to center section Remove process heads and bolts Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 177 9 5 Replacing Meter Body Continued Procedure continued Table 68 Replacing Meter Body Only continued Step
28. Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 88 Block Parameter Summary Continued Parameter Summary Continued Table 47 Transducer Block Parameter Summary continued Parameter Range Mnemonic Check PRIMARY VALUE in 20 Read only 4 deg C cie et SENSOR RANGE in H20 Read only 4 deg C sewogsw Prank RANGE SENSOR MAX SP in H20 Read only 4 deg C SENSOR MAX OVP in H20 0 Read only 4 deg C mox D Please read CAUTION about these parameters on page 88 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 119 8 8 Block Parameter Summary Continued Parameter Summary Continued Table 49 Resource Block Parameter Summary Parameter Obj Data Type Use Model Valid Initial Mnemonic Type Structure Range Value DL CMD1 Unsigned8 C Contained DL CMD2 Unsigned8 C Contained DL APPSTATE Unsigned16 C Contained DL SIZE Unsigned32 C Contained DL CHECKSUM Unsigned16 C Contained 5 ARRAY Unsigned32 C Contained BLOCK TEST A B Unsigneds C Contained D 4 ERROR DETAIL A 3 Unsigned16 C Contained D 6 AUX FEATURES Unsigned16 C Contained D 2 enum Table 50 Analog Input Function Block Parameter Summary Parameter Obj Data Type Use Model Valid Initial Mnemonic Type Structure Range Value BLOCK TEST A B Uns
29. LEVEL COEFF Floating point 14 RANGE O S Out of Service Continued on next page 90 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 5 Transducer Block Continued Table 35 Transducer Block Parameters continued Index Name Data Type Structure E Default Value CAL UNIT Unsigned16 inches of water 4 deg C 1147 5 SENSOR RANGE Seno F S 24 SENSOR SN 25 SENSOR MAXSP Sem S 26 SENSOR OVE S TANKRANGE Floatngpant s eok TEST Honeywell Diagnostic Parameters PV OVER RNG DATE Unsigned32 PV UNDER RNG CTR Unsigned32 PV UNDER RNG DATE aa TEMP OVER RNG OVER RNG CTR Unsgned32 OVER RNG DAT Unsigned32 S UNDER RNG CT Unsigned32 UNDER RNG DA Unsigned32 TEMP MAX MAX TEMP MAX Floating point point TEMP MIN Floating point EN STATIC PRESSURE Floating point 2 Fomm r se ovem ce mines 2 se over wow wee fw remon a _ sou one start s oae oare meer r oae pare restore 4 _ o oneone cen _ o ewsowezmo fw Please read CAUTION about these parameters on page 88 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Refer
30. ST 3000 Trend The ST 3000 FF has two defined trend objects for analog data Objects one for the AI function block one for the PID function block July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 133 8 14 Domain Objects Description Domain objects support download services which are used to download applications to a device Standard generic download services defined by Foundation Fieldbus are used in the domain object of the ST 3000 FF 134 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 15 Device Description DD Overview Device Description Contents Standard and Device Specific DD Device Descriptions and ODs Standardized definitions are used to support and describe application process objects Two of these standardized tools used to describe these objects are the Object Dictionary OD and the Device Description DD The Object Dictionary and the Device Descriptions define and describe the network visible objects of a device such as function blocks and block parameters These tools try to provide a consistency in understanding and describing these objects in device applications See also Object Dictionary description in the following section A typical DD contains information about the device parameters and operation such as e Attributes like coding name engineering unit write protection how to display etc The menu structure for listin
31. Series 100 and Series 900 Transmitter Type and Table Mounting Drawing Key Number Selections Angle Bracket MB SB Flat Bracket FB Number Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Differential Pressure STD110 STD120 STD125 See Key Number 51205895 51205893 eS STD130 STD170 Column 51205894 51205892 e STD125 Tank HTG 30756435 000 STD904 STD924 STD930 Table 51500357 51500355 lt STD974 C G K L 51500356 51500354 570924 STD930 Table X X A B E F J x X Transmitter Type and Equipped with Angle Bracket MB SB Flat Bracket FB Drawing Key Number A G manifold Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Number part Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Differential Pressure with Anderson Greenwood 3 way valve manifold STD110 STD120 STD125 M4AV1 51500426 51500424 51500428 51500422 STD130 STD170 M4TV1 51500427 51500425 51500429 51500423 lt STD924 5 0930 M4AV1 51500431 51500433 51500435 51500437 E M4TV1 51500430 51500432 51500434 51500436 570904 70924 570930 M4AV1 51500442 51500440 51500444 51500438 STD974 M4TV1 51500443 51500441 51500445 51500439 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 239 13 2 Dimension Drawings Continued Table 105 Dimension Drawings Series 100 and Series 900 continued Transmitter Type and Table Mounting
32. TIME_STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB_CODE Other VALUE 0 36 LO_LO_ALM UNACKNOWLEDGED Uninitialized ALARM_STATE Uninitialized TIME_STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB_CODE Other VALUE 0 37 AUX_VAR1 20 2925 38 BLOCK_TEST BLOCK TEST Constantly increases BLOCK_TEST 0x00 BLOCK_TEST 0x00 BLOCK_TEST 0x00 BLOCK_TEST 0x00 BLOCK_TEST 0x00 39 MAXIMUM PV Captured Max Value 40 MAXIMUM PV Captured Min value Continued on next page 272 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 ST 4000636 PID 4000636 PID 11 Device tag PID 4000636 PID 0 BLOCK_INFO BLOCK_TAG PID 4000636 DD_MEMBER 0x00000000 DD_ITEM 0x800202b0 DD_REVIS 0x0001 PROFILE 0x0108 PROFILE_REVISION 0x0103 EXECUTION_TIME 0x00000920 EXECUTION_PERIOD 0x00007d00 NUM_OF_PARAMS 0x004b NEXT_FB_TO_EXECUTE 0x0000 VIEWS_INDEX 0x01e9 NUMBER_VIEW_3 0x01 NUMBER_VIEW_4 0x01 ST_REV 0x0004 TAG_DESC STRATEGY 0x0000 ALERT_KEY 0x00 MODE_BLK TARGET Auto ACTUAL Auto PERMITTED ROut RCas Cas Auto Man OOS NORMAL Auto 6 BLOCK_ERR 0x0000 7 PV STATUS Good_NonCascade NonSpecific NotLimited VALUE 61 0979 8 SP STATUS Good Cascade NonSpecific NotLimited VALUE 46 9 OUT STATUS Good Cascade NonSpecific LowLimited VALUE 0 10 PV_SCALE EU_100 100 EU_0 0 UNITS_INDEX 0x0000 DEC
33. amp G Class 111 Division 1 T4 at 40 C T3A at 93 maximum ambient when connected in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204301 Nonincendive for use in Class 1 Division 2 Groups A B C amp D Suitable for Classes amp 111 Division 2 Groups F amp T4 at 93 C maximum ambient hazardous locations 24 Vdc max Environmental Indoor and outdoor hazardous locations NEMA 4X Foundation Fieldbus Option FF Class I Divisions 1 and 2 Entity Parameters 7 Groups A G Vmax lt 24V IMax 250 Pmax 1 2 W Ci 4 2nF Li 0 With no integral indicator or with integral Smart Meter option SM Li 150 uH With Analog Meter option ME Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204301 248 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations Continued Table A 2 CSA Entity Parameters Description CSA approval body certification for Explosionproof Class Division 1 Groups B C D Dust Ignition Proof Class Il III Division 1 Groups F Enclosure Type 4X Intrinsically Safe Class I Il IIl Division 1 Groups A B C D E F Enclosure Type 4X Non Incendive Class Division 2 Groups A D Enclosure Type 4X Foundation Fieldbus Option FF Class I II III Divisions 1 and 2 Groups A Entity Parameters G With no integral indicator or with
34. impulse piping and valves Continued on next page 284 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 C 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Steam heating continued It is common practice to use conventional steam traps on all steam heating systems They permit live superheated steam to enter the heating coils and piping down to the trap You should also use conventional steam traps with lower pressure desuperheated steam which cannot overheat the transmitter under warm day conditions If the heating pipes are not carefully installed to eliminate low spots and trapped condensate in the piping they could freeze at low temperatures steam traps require a periodic maintenance program Dirt scale and water softeners will cause traps to stick or jam which result in their either blowing steam continuously or not blowing steam allowing condensate freeze up in cold weather When steam traps are used for cold weather freeze protection of water lines a thermostat controlled steam supply valve which will shut off the steam at ambient temperatures higher than 50 F 10 C will save steam and prevent overheating A more general solution is offered by a specialized type of trap that throttles condensate flow based on its temperature This backs up hot water in the radiator within the insulated transmitter enclosure assuring temperatures no higher than the saturated steam at the reduced pressure Models are av
35. or 6 30756445 503 STG180 Gasket Viton for gasket only 30756445 504 narrow profile L P or 6 30756445 505 STG180 30756445 509 Gasket Graphite for replacement on existing STX22 STX40 Transmitter 6 with Graphite Gasket only 30753792 001 Bolts amp nuts kit all models narrow profile carbon steel K1 Nut hex metric M8 carbon steel 4 K4 Bolt hex head metric M8 50 mm long 4 30753793 002 A286 SS NACE Bolts amp 304 SS NACE nuts kit all models narrow profile K1 Nut hex 5 16 304 stainless steel 4 K4 Bolt hex head 5 16 18 4 30753793 003 Process Head Bolting 316 SS Non NACE Kit Includes Process Head Bolts and Nuts Contains K1 5 16 18 UNC 316 SS Non NACE Heavy Hex Nuts 4 K4 5 16 18 UNC 316 SS Non NACE Hex Cap Screw 4 Table 97 Replacement GP and AP Process Head Part Numbers for Narrow Profile Meter Body Material Fitting Size Models STA122 STA140 STG140 STG170 STG180 STA922 STA940 Carbon steel Series 100 9 16 18UNF 2B 30755124 001 Stainless steel Series 100 9 16 18UNF 2B 30755124 002 Carbon steel 2 in 30755124 005 Stainless steel 2 in 30755124 006 Monel 2 in 30755124 008 Hastelloy C 2 in 30755124 007 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 229
36. range values If OUT value is within the OUT SCALE range then OUT status Good Non Cascade alarm status Not Limited If OUT exceeds OUT SCALE range then OUT status Uncertain Engineering Units Range Violation amp High or Low Limited PRIMARY VALUE status OUT status Uncertain Uncertain 2 field in the OUT status Non Specific PRIMARY VALUE status Non Specific PRIMARY VALUE status High OUT status High or Low or Low The local meter display shows both the value and status of the AI block OUT parameter Normally the OUT parameter is shown in engineering units If the engineering units are not supported by the meter or if the units are unknown then the display shows no indication of units The bar graph is scaled from the high and low scale values of XD SCALE WhenL TYPE equals Direct the units indication will be the units of XD SCALE e WhenL TYPE equals Indirect the units indication will be the units of OUT SCALE If the status is Bad then an error condition is shown on the display See Subsection 7 4 for more details of the local meter display option Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 107 86 Analog Input Function Block Continued Mode Restricted Writing to the following AI block parameters are restricted by the 5 22 block s ACTUAL mode MODE BLK parameter must equal one of the modes in the mode column below before
37. the simulation jumper July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 69 Section 7 Operation 7 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section Topic See Page 7 1 Introduction enne 67 7 2 Operation Tasks essen 68 7 3 Monitoring Local Smart Meter 68 7 4 Changing Local Smart Meter Display 73 About this Section This section outlines the tasks for operating and monitoring the ST 3000 FF transmitter on a fieldbus network and as part of distributed process control system 70 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 7 2 Operation Tasks Fieldbus Device Once the ST 3000 FF is checked out it is ready for operation The tasks Operations listed in Table 26 outline the steps to startup and monitor transmitter operation Note that the task list serves as a typical example using the NI FBUS configuration application and Honeywell s SCAN 3000 supervisory system control applications Depending on your control system and operator interface and the supervisory control applications that you use the tasks involved for operation and control of fieldbus devices will vary Table 27 ST 3000 FF Operating Task List Start NIFB exe process Loads the communication application drivers in the operator station m
38. 002 Teflon and Viton 30754154 003 For STG180 38 K3 Specify complete Series 100 900 DP Models 36 1 model number from Series 900 DP Models 36 37 1 nameplate Series 100 900 GP AP Models 38 1 Series 900 GP Dual Head Model 39 1 Series 100 900 LGP and Series 900 AP Models 40 1 Series 900 Flush Mount Model 41 1 Series 100 900 Flange Mount Models 42 1 Series 100 High Temperature Models 43 1 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 237 Section 13 Reference Drawings 13 4 Wiring Diagrams Wiring Drawings The wiring diagrams for both intrinsically safe and non intrinsically safe installations are listed in Table 104 and are included in numerical order behind this section for wiring reference Table 104 External Wiring Diagrams Description ST 3000 FF For non intrinsically safe applications Pressure Transmitter For intrinsically safe applications Drawing Number 51309440 For FM approval 51204301 000 For CSA approval 51204302 000 238 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 13 2 Dimension Drawings Dimension Drawings Table 105 lists the available dimension drawings for reference If you need a copy of a drawing please determine the appropriate drawing number from the table and contact your Honeywell Representative to obtain a copy Table 105 Dimension Drawings
39. 29 PID Control Block Diagram BKCAL OUT BKCAL IN RCAS OUT ROUT IN ROUT OUT Setpoint Bypass Feed Forward CAS IN SP RATE DN BYPASS FF SCALE OUT HI LIM SP RATE UP FF GAIN OUT LO OUT SP HI LIM BAL TIME RCAS IN SP LO LIM Control GAIN RESET RATE Sp BAL_TIME Status Filter BKCAL_HYS PV_FTIME Output Track Mode SHED_OPT TRK_SCALE PID Control TRK_IN_D Function Block TRK_VAL 112 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 7 Function Block Continued PID Block Description PID Ideal and PID Robust PID Control Function Block is an algorithm that produces an output signal in response to the measured variable and the setpoint The PID function block allows you to choose either a standard PID control equation Ideal or a robust PID equation defined by Honeywell This selection is defined in the PID FORM parameter The output has three terms Proportional Integral and Derivative The output is adjusted by tuning constants There are three tuning constants in the Ideal PID equation The robust PID uses four tuning constants 1 GAIN is the tuning constant of the Proportional term RESET is the tuning constant of the Integral 3 RATE is the tuning constant of the Derivative RATE is usually modified by a lag which is set at some fixed ratio higher than the rate time to create a rate gain There is no lag with the rate in this implementation 4 OUT LAG is the
40. 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 034 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 300 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 041 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 3004 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 042 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 300 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 035 Flange adapter kit 2 Hastelloy 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 036 Flange adapter kit 2 Hastelloy 300 w st stl bolts w vent drain Continued on next page 236 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Table 103 Summary of Recommended Spare Parts Reference Spares for Part Number Description Figure Key 1 10 10 100 1100 1000 Number Number Units Units Units Electronics Housing Assembly Figs 34 amp 35 51309441 501 Electronics Module 34 5 1 1 2 2 4 30757503 001 Series 100 900 housing seal kit 34 amp 35 K1 1 1 2 2 4 51205897 501 Series 100 900 terminal assembly without lightning 35 3 K2 1 1 1 2 protection 51404078 502 Series 100 900 terminal assembly with lightning protection Process head gasket kit 1 1 4 4 10 For STD924 A B E F and J STD930 A B E F 37 39 K3 and J STG944 STG974 models 30757505 001 Teflon and Viton For all other Series 100 DP and STD924 C D G H K 36 K6 and L STD930 C D G H K and L and STD974 models 30753788 003 Teflon 30753788 004 Viton For STA122 STA140 STA922 STA940 STG140 38 K3 and STG170 30754154
41. 4 1 2 3 valve 15 pressure manifold transmitter Differential transmitter both HP and LP connections as shown The installation should be checked every 6 to 12 months to verify that the sealing liquid is at its required specific gravity Purging Purging air or water purges are commonly used to prevent viscous materials from clogging the impulse lines to pressure level or flow transmitters The bubbler system using a constant air flow regulator is particularly common on open tank liquid level applications No heating of impulse lines or transmitter is required but normal precautions required to keep water out of the air supply system Gas applications We must not overlook the possibility of condensate freezing in impulse lines to transmitters measuring gas flow or pressure Although these components could be heated similar to water and steam applications the simplest and best approach is to install transmitters so that they are self draining This means that the impulse lines are connected to the lowest Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 279 C 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Gas applications continued point in the transmitter meter body and the piping 15 sloped downward at least one inch per foot Side connected transmitters with vent drains at a lower point in the meter body must be regularly che
42. 4000636 DD MEMBER 0x00000000 DD ITEM 0x80020310 DD REVIS 0x0001 PROFILE 0x010b PROFILE REVISION 0x0103 EXECUTION TIME 0x00000000 EXECUTION PERIOD 0x00000000 NUM OF PARAMS 0x0031 NEXT FB TO EXECUTE 0x0000 VIEWS INDEX 0x01ed NUMBER VIEW 3 0x01 NUMBER VIEW 4 0x01 1 ST REV 0x0000 2 DESC 3 STRATEGY 0x0000 4 ALERT KEY 0x00 5 MODE TARGET Auto ACTUAL Auto PERMITTED Auto OOS NORMAL Auto 6 BLOCK ERR SimulationActive 7 RS STATE Online Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 263 Resource Block Continued 8 TEST RW Index Parameter mnemonic Value VALUE 1 FALSE VALUE 2 0x00 VALUE 3 0x0000 VALUE 4 0x00000000 VALUE 5 0x00 VALUE 6 0x0000 VALUE 7 0x00000000 VALUE 8 0 VALUE 9 NULL VALUE 10 NULL VALUE 11 01 01 00 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS VALUE 12 01 01 84 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS VALUE 13 0 00 00 00 DD HH MM SS VALUE 14 0x0000 VALUE 15 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS 9 DD RESOURCE NULL 10 MANUFAC 0x0048574cC Honeywell 11 DEV TYPE 0x0002 12 REV 0x09 13 DD REV 0x01 14 GRANT DENY GRANT 0x00 DENY 0x00 HARD TYPES Scalar Input RESTART Run FEATURES Reports Hard W Lock FEATURE SEL 0x0000 CYCLE TYPE Scheduled CYCLE SEL 0x0000 MIN CYCLE T 0x0000007dmillisec MEMORY SIZE 0x0000Kbytes 23 CY
43. 7 Typical Local Meter Faceplate Honeywell The ZERO pushbutton on the meter panel can be used to perform a zero correction to the transmitter See Section 10 Calibration for the procedure Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 11 1 6 Local Meter Option Continued About the option The Local Meter is a separate assembly that is designed to snap fit on the transmitter s electronics module The option assembly includes a cable and plug assembly for mating with a connector on the transmitter s transducer electronics board A meter end cap which includes a window is supplied on the electronics side of the transmitter s housing so you can view the meter display with the end cap installed See Figure 8 Figure 8 ST 3000 FF with Local Meter Option Electronics Housing Local Smart Meter Option 12 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Section 2 Installation Overview 2 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section Topic See Page 2 Introduction dre roe em e ri hd its 13 2 2 Advanced Diagnostics sss ener enne 14 2 3 Installation Components 16 2 4 Installation Operation Tasks 0 0 0 002 18 About this Section This section provides a list of components needed to install and operate the ST 3000 FF transmitter Also provided is a list of ty
44. Assemblies PWAs and the optional local smart meter assembly The PWAs are 1 Transducer board PWA 2 Stack board PWA The Transducer board and Stack board PWAs are connected together in a mounting bracket to make the electronics module assembly The electronics module is the recommended replacement unit for the electronics boards The procedure in Table 67 details the steps for replacing the smart meter option assembly and the electronics module that holds the transducer board and stack board PWAs within the transmitter We recommend that you use a ground strap or ionizer when handling the electronics module since electrostatic discharges can damage certain circuit components When servicing devices in a hazardous location keep covers tight while the transmitter is energized Disconnect power to the analyzer in the non hazardous area prior to opening transmitter housing for service or determine that the location is non hazardous prior to disconnecting or connecting the transmitter wires Table 67 Replacing Smart Meter and Electronics Module Step Action 1 Loosen end cap lock screw using supplied Allen key and unscrew end cap from terminal side of transmitter housing 2 Remove power to the transmitter by disconnecting the Signal and Signal wires from the transmitter terminal block 1 We recommend that you remove the transmitter from service and move it to a clean area before taking it apart
45. Block Honeywell Table 38 describes the Honeywell parameters included in the AI block defined Parameters Table 39 AI Block Parameter Descriptions Description Parameter Contents AUX VAR1 AUX VAR is the secondary variable of the block In the ST 3000 FF it contains the same value as the SENSOR TEMP parameter of the transducer block The parameter contains an FF status byte that reflects the condition of the value The transducer block parameter SENSOR TEMP UNIT selects the engineering units for this temperature BLOCK TEST An internal Honeywell test parameter See Section 11 7 and 11 8 for more details MAXIMUM PV Maximum PV pressure value that the device has experienced during it s service life Must be in Auto Mode MINIMUM PV Minimum PV pressure value that the device has experienced during it s service life Must be in Auto Mode Continued on next page 102 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 6 Analog Input Function Block Continued Transmitter Output Viewing certain parameters and their values in the transmitter and Signal and Status understanding their relationship to each other are helpful in understanding transmitter output signal and status The following paragraphs and tables describe transducer and AI block parameters which directly determine the way the transmitter output is presented Refer to Tables 39 and 40 and the AI block diagram for the following discussion Pressure S
46. Connection 1 4 inch NPT High Pressure Side Flange Method execution has completed Write Changes Read All July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 155 8 20 Resource Block Methods Continued Flange Assembly 51 4616821 RS 4616821 RB2 Apply Values Main RS Menu RS 4616821 RB2 4 4 6 xa 2 23 ri Lieder 2 oos Process Tuning Options Alarms Diagnostics Others Methods Flange Assembly R1CO0 Pseudo Flange on Standard DP 3 inch ANSI Class 150 with Vent Drain 3161 SS wetted Note ANSI Flanges have 125 500 AARH Surface Finish Gasket Ring Wetted Flush Design 3161 55 Extension Wetted Diameter 1 87 inches for 2 3 or 4 inch spud Length 2 inches Method execution has completed Write Changes Read All 156 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 21 Transducer Block Methods The Main XD Menu tab was added to the Transducer Block to provide additional access both parameters and methods The parameters provide access data similar to that contained in the block parameters while the methods provide access to data provided by multi block parameters or a means to automate a procedure such as calibration or manage data reset certain diagnostic data The Main XD Menu contains both Parameter and Method items These are shown below ST 4616821 XD 4616821 ST3000TB Apply Values
47. Continued Mechanical diaphragm seals continued Figure C 5 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seal Impulse piping shut off valve and diaphragm seal distance must be as short as possible and insulated along with the process pipe or vessel Lol rj Shut off valve Process pressure transmitter with 1 Pipe union or metal diaphragm coupling seal Electric heating Most transmitters will withstand higher temperatures at their process interfaces bodies than at their electronics Normally it is impractical to heat transmitter bodies above 225 to 250 F 107 to 121 C without radiant and conducted heat exceeding the rating at the electronics normally 200 F 93 C Prefabricated insulated enclosures with integral heating coils and thermostats set at 200 F 93 can assure viscosity of fluids which freeze below 180 F 82 C while assuring safe transmitter operation For water or similar lower temperature mediums the control be set at 50 F 10 C to save energy and call for heat only when temperature and wind conditions require Systems can be engineered for uncontrolled continuous electric heating to prevent water freezing at 0 F 18 C and 20 mph wind velocity while not exceeding 225 F 107 C at the transmitter body at 90 F 32 C ambient and zero wind velocity The operating costs in energy for these systems usually exceed the
48. Device Reference Guide xvii Technical Assistance Contacts World Wide Web The following lists Honeywell s World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our customers Honeywell Organization WWW Address URL Corporate http www honeywell com Honeywell Process Solutions http npsweb honeywell com ps Technical tips http content honeywell com ipc faq Telephone Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below Organization Phone Number United States and Canada Honeywell 1 800 423 9883 Tech Support 1 800 525 7439 Service xviii ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Where to Find Information in This Manual About this Manual Background and Pre installation Information Transmitter Installation Procedures Transmitter Configuration This manual provides installation operation maintenance for the ST 3000 Series 100 Transmitter with Fieldbus FOUNDATION communications option Reference information is also provided The sections of information contained in the manual follow this order Background and Pre installation Transmitter mechanical and electrical installation Transmitter configuration Operation and maintenance Reference Information Sections 1 through 4 provide background and pre installation information if you are not familiar with the ST 3000 FF transmitter or if this is a new installation Section 1 covers the basic transmitter description Se
49. Guide July 2011 6 4 Verify Communications with Transmitter Continued Table21 Transmitter Identification continued Look at this Parameter To Verify Resource Block REVISION ARRAY The firmware revision number of the REVISION ARRAY 0 e Stack board firmware REVISION ARRAY 1 Stack board boot code REVISION ARRAY 2 e Transducer board firmware Note These numbers are helpful when troubleshooting the device The numbers when viewed as hexadecimal numbers are in the format MMmm Where MM is the major revision number and mm is the minor revision number Device Tag The device tag is correct Physical device tag name of the transmitter Note The device tag name can be set and Device Tag name viewed using the fieldbus device configurator application Use a device tag name up to eight characters that does not contain spaces See also Tag Name Assignments below Transducer Block SENSOR SN Sensor serial The SENSOR SN value when viewed as a hexadecimal number is the same number as the first 8 digits of the PROM ID stamped on the transmitter housing nameplate See NOTE NOTE The 8 digit serial number in the SENSOR SN parameter does not show the last two digits of the PROM ID stamped on the nameplate of the transmitter housing The Device ID does contain the full 10 digit PROM ID Tag Name Assignments If device or block tags have not been assigned to a de
50. Intrinsically Safe Zone 0 1 Ex ia IIC ZA Flameproof Zone 1 Ex d IIC Multiple Marketing ATEX LCIE approval body certification for e Intrinsically Safe Zone 0 9II 1 Ex ia II C e Intrinsically Safe Zone 1 126 Ex ia ATEX LCIE approval body certification for Dust tight Zone 0 52111 D Ex tD A20 IP6X Flameproof and Dust tight Zone 1 59112 GD Ex d IIC Ex tD A21 6 ATEX LCIE approval body certification for Non Sparking Zone 2 Ex nA IIC Ex tD A22 IP6X ATEX LCIE approval body certification for 3C Intrinsically Safe Zone 0 1 1 GD Ex ia Ex tD A20 IP6X Multiple Flameproof Zone 1 5912 GD Ex d IIC Ex tD A21 6 Marketing Non Sparking Zone 2 amp 913GD Ex ia Ex tD A22 IP6X CERTUSP INMETRO Brazil approval body certification for Flameproof Zone 1 BR Ex d e Intrinsically Safe Zone 0 1 BR Ex ia No certification 256 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 A 2 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Classification of Hazardous Locations Continued Process Sealing Process Sealing for Classes I Il and Divisions 1 and 2 and Class Zone 0 1 and 2 Explosion proof Electrical Systems ST 3000 Smart Pressure Transmitters The ST 3000 Series 100 100e 600 and 900 Smart Pressure Transmitters are CSA certified as Dual Seal devices in accordance with ANSI ISA 12 27 01 20
51. The number of field devices connected on a segment is limited depending on voltage of the power supply resistance of the cable and current drawn by each device See Voltage Resistance and Current 3 Attenuation and distortion of the signal on the fieldbus due to resistance of the cable varying characteristic impedance along the cable signal reflections from spur connections and other factors that limit the size of a network segment Various types of cable are useable for fieldbus network wiring Table 16 lists the cable types Please note that Type A is the preferred cable to use for fieldbus then type B etc Fieldbus Cable Types Fieldbus Cable Type Construction Maximum DC resistance Ohms km Maximum attenuation db km 39 kHz Wire Size AWG Characteristic Impedance Ohms 31 25 kHz 70 130 80 120 gt Shielded twisted pair y gt Multi twisted pair with shield y gt Multi twisted pair without shield Type D gt Multi core without twisted pairs and having an overall shield z 7 Maximum Capacitive unbalance pf 1 kilometer length 2000 2000 Not specified Continued on next page 50 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 5 44 Wiring ST 3000 FF Transmitter Continued Voltage Resistance and Current Number of Devices and Spur Length Power supply output voltage c
52. The off line configuration or bench check is an optional procedure for checking out your transmitter This section provides a procedure for configuring the ST 3000 FF off line meaning you can load configuration information into the transmitter before it is connected in a fieldbus network This enables you to configure the transmitter before installation Calibration is also possible before the transmitter is installed in the field Device Calibration Your transmitter was factory calibrated to its standard range or a range specified on the purchase order This means there is no need to recalibrate the transmitter during installation If you need to calibrate the transmitter before installation the setup is the same as for the benchcheck and the calibration procedures can be found in Section 10 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 19 3 2 Off line Configuration Configure ST 3000 FF Using the NI FBUS Configurator software or other fieldbus device Before Installation configuration application you can perform an off line check of the ST 3000 FF before it is mounted and connected to the process hardware and the fieldbus network By wiring the transmitter to the fieldbus interface of a PC and using a fieldbus power supply to furnish power to the transmitter you can read and write parameters in the ST 3000 FF See Figure 10 and Table 3 for procedure Figure 10 Configuration Setup Figure Oper
53. about the same latent heat or the same Btu s pound at the reduced pressure Therefore in our example steam at 100 psig and 338 F 170 C when reduced to 30 psig steam will have a temperature of 306 F 152 C or loss of only 329 18 C This steam temperature can only be reduced by using a desuperheater This device mixes cold water with the superheated steam to reduce its temperature by removing Btu s per pound of water steam It is also possible to use temperature controlled steam traps which actually allow the steam to condense to water and therefore reduce its temperature to a pre set value Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 289 C 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Superheated steam considerations continued Table C 2 lists the various values of steam pressure saturated steam temperatures at these pressures degrees of superheat added to the saturated steam and finally the actual temperature of each when it is reduced to 30 psig steam Table C 2 Steam Pressure Versus Steam Temperature Values Pressure Saturated Superheat Added Final Steam Actual Temperature 1 Temperature Temperature of Steam When Reduced From 1 to 30 psig poe Ip owe p wee d 147 338 1 equals pressure in column one with superheat added 290 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Alarm reporting 132
54. by setting the hardware Mode simulation jumper to the Y position Additionally AI block SIMULATE parameter must be set to the following values SIMULATE STATUS Good alarm status constant suggested setting SIMULATE VALUE supplied by user Used as the input to the Al block ENABLE DISABLE Active Enabled Simulation Mode The truth table in Table 91 shows the states of the simulation jumper Truth Table and SIMULATE parameter to activate the simulation mode Table 91 Simulation Mode Truth Table When the Simulation and the SIMULATE Enable Disable is set to Jumper on Transducer board is set to 1 Disabled 2 Active Simulation Disabled Simulation Disabled Simulation Disabled Simulation Active Al Block Mode To connect the AI block input to the output the AI block must be in AUTO mode July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 217 Section 12 Parts List 121 Replacement Parts Part Identification e All individually salable parts are indicated in each figure by key number callout For example 1 2 3 and so on e parts that are supplied in kits are indicated in each Figure by key number callout with the letter prefix For example K2 K3 and so on e Parts denoted with f are recommended spares See Table 103 for summary list of recommended spare parts Figure 32 shows major parts for given model with parts list Figure references
55. cascade initialization cannot be in BYPASS O S or MAN Bypass must be enabled in control opts to set ON O S or MAN PID FORM ALGO TYPE FF GAIN FF SCALE TRK SCALE OUT SCALE PV SCALE HI LIM HI LIM LO LIM LO LO LIM OUT HI LIM OUT LO LIM O S or MAN Limited to range of respective enumeration Enforces implied rank order Enforces implied rank order Note OUT will be forced within range limits when limits are changed July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 115 8 8 Table Description Table 47 Column Title Attribute Obj Type Object Type Data Type Structure Use Model Use and Model Reference The letter for use is separated by a slash from the model name Block Parameter Summary Table 46 provides a description of the block parameter attributes that are presented in the Block Parameter Summary Tables 47 through 50 Table Description for Block Parameter Summary Object type for the parameter value S Simple Variable R Record A Array of simple variables Data Type or Structure for the parameter value 1 Data Types consist of a simple variable or array and are Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Unsigned32 An unsigned variable of 8 16 or 32 bits Float Floating point variable 2 Data Structures consist of a record which may be Value and Status float Value and status of a floating point parameter Scaling Static data use
56. causes and recommended actions Table 78 Device Troubleshooting Table B Device and or block objects not identified UNKnown or Parameters are not visible or identified by name or Honeywell defined parameters are not visible Things to check Recommended Action Incorrect Standard Dictionary Verify that the Standard Dictionary Install the compatible version of Device Description DD or the DD or symbols files are correct Standard Dictionary and DD for Symbols on Host computer for the device the device on the host computer Incorrect pathnames to Check that the pathname to Make sure that the pathname of descriptions on host locations of the Standard Dictionary the Standard Dictionary and DD computer and DD files on the host computer are in the correct location for the is correct fieldbus software application CA release 48574C 0002 Incorrect revision of Device Read the following Resource block Perform a code download of the Resource Block firmware parameters correct device firmware See Section 9 Maintenance e DEV_REV contains the revision level of the resource block DD_REV contains the revision level of the resource block Incorrect revision level of the Read the three elements of the Perform a code download of the device firmware REVISION_ARRAY parameter correct device firmware See which are Section 9 Maintenance e Stack board firmware e Stack board boot code e Transducer board firm
57. consists of the letters IP followed by two numerals The first characteristic numeral indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure with respect to persons and solid foreign objects entering the enclosure The second characteristic numeral indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure with respect to the harmful ingress of water Continued on next page 258 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Enclosure Ratings Continued IEC Designations Table A 6 provides an approximate conversion from NEMA enclosure continued type numbers to IEC enclosure classification designations The NEMA types meet or exceed the test requirements for the associated IEC classifications for this reason the Table cannot be used to convert from IEC classifications to NEMA types Table A 6 NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and Comparable IEC Enclosure Classification NEMA Enclosure IEC Enclosure DM Number Classification Designation IP 10 IP 11 IP 54 IP 14 3S IP 54 4 and 4X IP 56 5 6 and 6P 12 and 12K 13 NOTE This comparison is based on tests specified in IEC Publication 529 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 259 4 Table Ill Options Reference Codes and Table A 4 lists available ST 3000 FF Table III approval body options Descriptions alphabetically and numerically by their codes and gives a brief description of the options Note that rest
58. errors prevent a device block from leaving O S mode The BLOCK ERR parameter bit 1 shows whether a block configuration error is present Table 87 summarizes the conditions that may be the result of block configuration errors which in turn cause a device fault Follow the recommended actions to correct these errors Table 87 Summary of Configuration Errors Problem Fault Probable Cause Recommended Action Name of parameters are not Missing or incorrect version of Device Check path to Device visible Description file on host computer Description Load correct version of DD Unable to write successfully to Mode not supported in TARGET and or Verify that the mode being MODE BLK of any block PERMITTED modes for the given block written is supported by the block If writing TARGET mode only then the desired mode must already be set in the PERMITTED field If writing the whole MODE BLK record then the mode set in TARGET must also be set in the PERMITTED field Other modes may also be set in the PERMITTED field but target mode must be set Unable to write to a parameter 1 Parameter is read only Subindex of the parameter is read only Some parameters have fields that are not writeable individually such as MODE BLK ACTUAL Write locking is active Resource block parameter WRITE LOCK Remove write protect jumper value is 2 see Subsection 6 6 Corresponding block is in the wrong mode Some parameters can only Write
59. factory calibration which is done at the end of the process against the ordered range While clearing the calibration will return the transmitter to a close approximation of the previous calibration using its stored characterization data the accuracy of the reset transmitter will be lower than the specified factory calibrated accuracy The calibration is not exact since the transmitter mounting angle may be different than the factory mounting angle This means that the transmitter is calculating its output based on the characterization equation alone without any compensation for the small residual errors of zero offset and span correction A typical zero offset correction is less than 0 1 inH2O for a 400 inH2O range and a typical span correction is less than 0 2 regardless of the range down to the point where specification turndown begins The typical performance of a 400 inH5O transmitter after clearing calibration or a Corrects Reset as it is often called can be expressed as Accuracy 0 2 100 By correcting the zero input the typical performance will be 0 2 better For other transmitter ranges the initial zero offset will be scaled by the ratio of the Upper Range Limit URL to 400 inH2 O at 39 2 F 4 C Thus for a 100 psi range the initial zero offset can be expressed by pum Note that these are typical values and they may vary However our patented characterization method includes several techn
60. generated when alarm conditions clear Acknowledgment of alarms may be necessary to satisfy operation requirements Event Messages e Event messages contain a time stamp Events also must be confirmed otherwise the block will continually report the event Acknowledgment of event may be necessary to satisfy operation requirements 132 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 13 Trend Objects Description Trend objects support the management and control of function blocks by providing user access to history information Trend objects provide for short term history data to be collected and stored within a resource The collected data may be input and output parameters and status information from selected function blocks Trend objects are available anytime for you to view Trend Data Types Trend record data may include one of these types of data e analog e discrete or not used in ST 3000 FF bit string not used in ST 3000 FF It is important that the proper trend data type be chosen to match the data type being recorded Trend information may be used in support of trending in interface devices or by function block objects that require historical information Trend Objects Trend objects e Provide short term history data Track both values and status Track and hold the last 16 values e Allow user defined sampling rate e Allow efficient transfer of large amounts of data
61. index by the AP The index serves as a means of identification and location of individual objects The entries in the Application Process OD are organized as follows Index 0 Object Dictionary Description Describes overall structure of the OD Index 1 255 Reserved for descriptions of data types and data structures used by the AP There are a number of standard data types and data structures already defined as part of Foundation Fieldbus specifications Index starting at 256 Entries for AP objects defined by the application These entries contain the records and parameters for the various blocks that make up the AP Also included are alert trend view link and domain objects which are defined by the AP Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 137 8 16 Object Dictionary OD Continued ST 3000 FF Object Table 56 shows the indexes of object descriptions within the object Dictionary dictionary for the ST 3000 FF Table 57 ST 3000 FF Object Dictionary Continued on next page 138 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 16 Object Dictionary OD Continued To Calculate Index To calculate the index of any block parameter or object add the index in number of an Object he block s parameter or object list to the index of the block s record the list above For example OUT Index of 8 in the AI block parameter list
62. memory where their database resides Diagnostic routines are performed in the background during device operation which check the integrity of these individual databases When a failure is detected a status bitis setin the BLOCK ERR parameter in the appropriate block object Diagnostic checks are performed continuously on the device functional databases of the transmitter application shown in Table 84 Table 84 Areas of Device Memory Where Data is Stored Device Functional Area Location Block object database DB RAM and EEPROM Communication stack database DB EEPROM Boot ROM ROM Program ROM ROM Trend and link object databases DB EEPROM BLOCK ERR parameter shows diagnostic faults of hardware and software components within the transmitter Each block object in the transmitter device application contains a BLOCK ERR parameter BLOCK ERR is actually a bit string which provides a means to show multiple status or error conditions A status message identifying the fault can be viewed by accessing the parameter Table 85 shows the bit mapping of the BLOCK ERR parameter To verify that block and background diagnostics are executing in a particular block View the BLOCK TEST parameter of the block e Ifthe first element of the parameter BLOCK TEST is incrementing the block is executing and the diagnostics are active e Ifthe first element value is not increasing the block is not executing Continued on next page
63. of elementary functions which are modeled as function blocks block objects These block objects provide a general structure for defining different types of device functions such as analog inputs analog outputs and proportional integral derivative PID control The FBAP also contains other objects that provide other device functions such as furnishing alarm information historical data and links to other blocks for transferring data The key elements of the FBAP are device objects which are of the following object types Block objects and their parameters consisting of the following block types Resource blocks Transducer blocks Function blocks Link Objects e Alert Objects Trend Objects e View Objects Domain Objects Link objects allow the transfer of process data from one block to another View Alert and Trend objects provide a way of handling function block parameters for operator interface of views alarms and events and historical data A brief description of these objects is presented in the following sections July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 81 8 3 Block Description Block Objects Blocks are some of the key elements that make up the FBAP The blocks contain data block objects and parameters which define the application such as the inputs and outputs signal processing and connections to other applications The ST 3000 FF transmitter appl
64. page 82 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 3 Block Description Continued FBAP Block Diagram Figure 26 shows the important elements of the ST 3000 FBAP Figure 26 FBAP Block Diagram Resource Resource Block Transducer Block Block PID Block Sensor channel value Algorithm 1 OUT Algorithm OUT 1 IN publish read subscr read write read write read write publish Communication Stack Note Not all parameters are shown Each of these blocks contain parameters which are standard Foundation Fieldbus defined parameters In other words the parameters are pre defined as part of the FF protocol for all fieldbus devices Additionally there are parameters which are defined by Honeywell and are specific to the ST 3000 FF transmitter The following pages provide descriptions of the block objects in the ST 3000 FF along with a complete listing of the parameters contained in each block The block description lists the predefined fieldbus parameters as well as the Honeywell defined extension parameters A summary of the Honeywell parameters is provided also For a complete description of the FF parameters see the Foundation Fieldbus document FF 891 Foundation Specification Function Block Application Process Part 2 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Refer
65. parameters its block type specifies It can be a resource block transducer block or a function block A step in system design selecting functional units assigning their locations and identifiers and defining their interconnections A physical entity capable of performing one or more specific functions Examples include transmitters actuators controllers operator interfaces Description of FBAPs within a device Files that describe the software objects in a device such as function blocks and parameters The DD binary are created by passing DD source files through a standard tool called a tokenizer A standardized programming language similar to C used to write device description source files The Physical Device Tag of the device as specified in the Foundation Fieldbus specifications An instantaneous occurrence that is significant to scheduling block execution and to the operational event view of the application A fieldbus compatible device that contains and executes function blocks Communications protocol for a digital serial two way system which interconnects industrial field equipment such as sensors actuators and controllers An executable software object that performs a specific task such as measurement or control with inputs and outputs that connect to other function blocks in a standard way The part of the device software that executes the blocks function transducer or resource blocks A devic
66. set to the W Position Read Write Position at power up to enable write access HARD W LOCK HARD W LOCK element of the FEATURE SEL parameter acts as a parameter switch to prevent changes to the transmitter configuration When the write protect jumper is set to the position and HARD LOCK 15 set any value stored in the transmitter s non volatile memory cannot be changed You can only read the parameter values from the device Normal block execution continues Table 26 Write Protect Feature Truth Table HARD W LOCK is set to Jumper is in this position at 0 1 Yes W Position Read Write Write Protect Disabled Write Protect Disabled Read Write Read Write R Position Read Only Write Protect Disabled Write Protect Enabled Read Write Read Only Changes to jumper position are not activated until power up 2 HARD W LOCK feature can only be changed from write protect enabled read only to write protect disabled read write when the jumper has been enabled for read write Simulation Jumper There is a second hardware jumper also on the transducer board which is used for debugging communication problems independent of sensor function See Figure 24 A simulation parameter in the AI block is used to aid in system debug if the process is not running A hardware jumper is provided to enable or disable the simulate parameter See Section 11 10 for details on setting
67. stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 009 Flange adapter kit 172 NPT st stl 1507 w st stl bolts 51204983 010 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT st stl 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 021 Flange adapter kit 172 NPT st stl 150 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 022 Flange adapter kit 172 NPT st stl 150 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 011 Flange adapter kit 1 NPT Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts 51204983 012 Flange adapter kit 172 NPT Hastelloy 1504 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 025 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 1508 w st stl bolts 51204983 026 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 037 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 1504 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 038 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl 1502 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 027 Flange adapter kit 2 Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts 51204983 028 Flange adapter kit 2 Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 029 Flange adapter kit 172 st stl 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 030 Flange adapter kit 172 st stl 300 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 039 Flange adapter kit 172 st stl 300 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 040 Flange adapter kit 172 st stl 300 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 031 Flange adapter kit 172 Hastelloy 300 w st stl bolts 51204983 032 Flange adapter kit 172 Hastelloy 300 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 033 Flange adapter kit 2 st stl
68. that grounding may be required to meet optional approval body certification Transmitters are available with additional lightning protection if they will be used in areas highly susceptible to lightning strikes Intrinsically Safe Fieldbus barriers should be installed per manufacturer s instructions for Applications transmitters to be used in Intrinsically Safe I S applications The number of field devices on a segment may be limited due to power limitations in hazardous area installations Special fieldbus barriers and special terminators may be required Also the amount of cable may be limited due to its capacitance or inductance per unit length Refer to Foundation Fieldbus document AG 163 31 25 kbit s Intrinsically Safe Systems Application Guide for detailed information on connecting fieldbus devices for I S applications Transmitter Wiring The procedure in Table 18 shows the steps for connecting fieldbus cable Procedure to the transmitter For external wiring diagrams refer to the installation drawings presented in Section 13 Detailed drawings are provided for transmitter installation in non intrinsically safe areas and for intrinsically safe loops in hazardous area locations Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 53 5 4 Wiring ST 3000 FF Transmitter Continued 1 wiring must comply with local codes regulations and ordinances Table 19 Wiring th
69. the fault occurs again Repeat the write to the RESTART parameter 4 Ifthe fault occurs again Replace the transmitter electronics module If a ROM error Memory Failure occurs in the resource block it may take up to 10 seconds for the fault to reappear July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 205 11 5 Non Critical Fault Summary Non critical Failures Table 82 summarizes the conditions that could cause a non critical fault in the ST 3000 FF transmitter along with recommended actions to correct the fault Table 82 Summary of Non critical Faults Problem Fault Probable Cause Recommended Action status of OUT parameter is G ood alarm status Constant Uncertain alarm status inaccurate One of the following Al alarms is active in ALARM_SUM CURRENT Al block is in Manual mode Transducer block parameter CAL_SOURCE NONE ora value of 1 using default characterization values Excess span correction correction at CAL_POINT_HI is greater than 5 of CAL_POINT_HI Excess zero correction correction at CAL_POINT_LO is greater than 5 of the URL characterized range of the sensor Meter body overload pressure input is greater than two times the rated sensor pressure PV value of transducer block is outside range of XD_SCALE When AI block CHANNEL 1 OR OUT value of Al block is outside of OUT_SCALE range HI HI HI LO LO LO OUT has crossed the c
70. the pressure measurement is put through a level polynomial calculation and then placed in CALC VAL and passed to the Al block CALC VAL contains the result of the level polynomial calculation If CALC VAL is not selected then no calculation is performed and CALC VAL contains a value of 0 0 with a status of Bad NonSpecifiic Al parameter CHANNEL 1 SENSOR TEMP Contains the sensor temperature in degrees Celsius which is provided to the AI block SENSOR TEMP UNIT Allows user selected units to be displayed in SENSOR TEMP LEVEL COEFF An array that contains the coefficients for the level polynomial calculation See Level Calculation below for a description PRIMARY VALUE RANG Contains the 4 attributes selected for the value reported in E PRIMARY VALUE These are 1 Upper range and 2 Lower range for display purposes 3 Engineering units 4 Decimal places for display purposes CAL CMD The calibration command parameter which is a one byte value that selects the calibration operation to be performed CAL POINT HI The upper calibration trim point CAL POINT LO The lower calibration trim point CAL STATUS The status of the selected calibration command in progress success or failed CAL SOURCE The source of the device calibration none factory user CAL UNIT 8 The engineering units used in the calibration See Section 10 Calibration for details on these parameters Continued on ne
71. the replacement electronics module at the transmitter housing 12 Plug the flex tape cable into the connector on Transducer Board PWA Plug power cable in to the connector on Transducer Board PWA Place retaining clip over the flex tape and power connectors Flex Tape Connector Meter Connector Transducer PWA Connector Side Power Connector 13 Correctly orient and insert the electronics module back into the transmitter housing Secure module in the transmitter housing with the two retaining screws Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 175 9 4 Replacing Transmitter Electronics Continued Procedure continued Table 67 Replacing Smart Meter and Electronics Module continued Step Action 14 If equipped with smart meter Rotate meter to the desired orientation for viewing and attach the meter to mounting bracket assembly using a clockwise turn You can rotate the meter mounting orientation in 90 degree increments 15 Lubricate end cap O ring with silicon grease such as Dow Corning 33 or equivalent and replace end 16 Reinstall the transmitter and restore power by reconnecting the fieldbus cable to the SIGNAL and terminals of the transmitter 17 Perform application download to transmitter Reconfigure transmitter as required 18 Recalibrate transmitter Refer to Section 10
72. to the system except to a leakage current of 501A for each connected device Separately powered equipment needs a galvanic isolation to insure that the intrinsically safe Fieldbus circuit remains passive The cable used to interconnect the devices needs to comply with the following parameters Loop resistance R 15Q km 150 O km Inductance per unit length L 0 4mH km 1mH km Capacitance per unit length C 45nF km 200nF km Length of spur cable 60m maximum Length of trunk cable 1km maximum Terminators At each end of the trunk cable a fm approved line terminator with the following parameters 1s suitable 900 1020 0 22 uF 1 Norevision to drawing without prior fm approval 2 Associated apparatus manufacturer s installation drawing must be followed when installing this equipment 3 The FISCO associated apparatus must be fm approved 4 Control equipment connected to FISCO barrier must not use or generate more than 250Vrms or 250Vdc Resistance between FISCO ground and earth ground must be less than 10 6 Installation should be in accordance with ANSI ISA RP12 06 01 Installation of Intrinsically Safe Systems for Hazardous Classified Locations and the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 7 The FISCO concept allows interconnection of Fieldbus intrinsically safe apparatus with FISCO associated apparatus when the following 15 true Vmax or Ui 2 Voc Vt or Uo d Imax or Ii gt isc It or Io
73. use the DD to determine what information is available from the device what rules must be applied when accessing the information and how the information can be displayed to you Standardized The use of standardized descriptions and definitions to describe device Descriptions and application processes promotes the interoperability of fieldbus devices Interoperability 136 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 16 Object Dictionary OD Overview Object Dictionary Description OD Entries The Object Dictionary OD is one of a number of standardized tools used to describe and define Application Process AP objects function blocks block parameters alert objects etc The OD is used in conjunction with standard and device specific Device Descriptions DD to provide a complete description of the device s application process Device Descriptions contain standard and device specific text descriptions of function blocks and block parameters in device applications See Device Description also in the previous section AP objects are described in the Object Dictionary OD The OD is comprises a series of entries each describing an individual AP object and its message data The message data may consist of a number of characteristics defined for that particular object The OD allows the FBAP of a device to be visible to the fieldbus communications system OD entries are assigned an
74. valid mode to MODE BLK be written to in O S mode only or in parameter of block O S or MAN O S or Manual modes modes See Mode Restricted Writes to Parameters in Data written to the parameter is out Subsections 8 6 and 8 7 of the valid range for that parameter Write valid range values to Subindex used is invalid for that parameter parameter Enter valid subindex for parameter Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 211 11 8 Block Configuration Errors Continued Table 87 Summary of Configuration Errors continued Problem Fault Probable Cause Unable to change Resource The second element of block to Auto mode BLOCK TEST is non zero Recommended Action Write all zeroes to the second element of the BLOCK TEST parameter Resource block is in O S mode Write Auto mode to Unable to change Transducer 1 block to Auto mode Unable to change Analog Input block from O S mode The second element of BLOCK TEST is non zero There is a configuration error in the block The block has not been configured to execute It is neither in the function block schedule in the System Management Information Base nor is it linked to another executing block via the next block to execute field in the block record relative parameter index 0 Resource block is in O S mode Block configuration error MODE_BLK TARGET of the Resource block Write all z
75. with 316 st steel NACE bolts K9 Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg optional flange adapter 4 K11 Not Shown Gasket flange adapter 2 K10 Not Shown Flange adapter 2 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 227 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Figure 38 Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter Body K1 Table 96 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 38 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 2 See Table 97 Process head GP AP models 1 1 Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body without head GP AP Models 1 model number from nameplate Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without head GP AP Models 1 model number from nameplate Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Kit 30754154 0021 Head gasket kit for all models with narrow profile meter body except STG180 3 sets 30754154 003T Head gasket kit for model STG180 with narrow profile meter body 3 sets K2 O ring 3 Continued on next page 228 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Table 96 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 38 continued Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit K3 Gasket Teflon for gasket only 30756445 502 narrow profile L P
76. with a STATUS of Good or Uncertain Read the first element of BLOCK TEST Number should be increasing indicating that block is running If block is not running check the 2 element of BLOCK TEST Check if BLOCK ERR bit 3 is set 3 Read BLOCK ERR Recommended Action The default values of these parameters are configuration errors and they must be set to a valid value See Clearing Block Configuration Errors Subsection 11 9 If SIMULATE ENABLE DISABLE Enabled write disable to parameter If 2 element of BLOCK TEST is nonzero write all zeroes to element If bit 3 is set verify that SIMULATE parameter block is disabled Verify that simulate jumper is not in simulate position See Subsection 11 7 for details on BLOCK ERR Download a new function block schedule Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 201 11 3 Device Troubleshooting Continued Non Functioning Blocks Continued Table 78 Device Troubleshooting Table C continued e Device output is not updating y Things to check Recommended Action PID block mode is O S Read MODE_BLK ACTUAL of PID Set MODE_BLK TARGET to Auto block PID block is not running Read the first element of If 2 element of BLOCK TEST is BLOCK TEST Number should nonzero write all zeroes to be increasing indicating that element block is running If block is not running check the 27
77. you can write values to the parameters listed in Table 41 Table 42 AI Block Mode Restricted Parameters OUT Man or O S modes XD SCALE Man or O S modes OUT SCALE Man or O S modes lO OPTS O S mode only STATUS OPTS O S mode only CHANNEL O S mode only L TYPE Man or O S modes 108 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 7 PID Function Block PID Block Description PID Function block provides you with the choice of selecting either a standard PID control equation Ideal or a robust PID which is defined in Table 43 PID Block Parameter Table 42 lists the block parameters and default values for the PID List function block Table 43 PID Control Function Block Parameters Data Type Structure Default Value 2 TAG DESC Octet string S all blanks 3 STRATEGY Unsigned16 4 ALERT KEY Unsigned8 Bocke b a D i2 GRANT DENY Access pormissors Btsim S 4 C Value and Status 16 vime S 9 Unmmeds S 9 CASIN and Staus foat_ N SPRATEDN 58 SP_RATE UP semm S mo 3 som Foara S o s o 24 S NF 35 BALTME Floatngpoint S 9 f S 9 BKGNON Vawe ra Staus
78. 0 mm 7 48 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 235 mm 9 25 in Pseudo Flange 2 inch 150 Ibs serrated face flange with 4 holes 15 9 mm 5 8 in diameter Head 120 6 mm 4 3 4 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 152 4 mm 6 in 3 inch 150 Ibs serrated face flange with 4 holes 19 mm 3 4 in diameter on 152 mm 6 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm 7 1 2 in Flush Mount 25 4 mm 1 inch pipe mount 316L SS standard option Gauge STG93P General Piping e When measuring fluids containing suspended solids install Guidelines permanent valves at regular intervals to blow down piping Blow down all lines on new installations with compressed air or steam and flush them with process fluids where possible before connecting these lines to the transmitter s meter body e Be sure all the valves in the blow down lines are closed tight after the initial blow down procedure and each maintenance procedure after that Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 45 5 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Installing Flange Table 14 gives the steps for an optional flange adapter on the process Adapter head Slightly deforming the gasket supplied with the adapter before you insert it into the adapter may aid in retaining the gasket in the groove while you align the adapter to the process head To
79. 0 014 to EN 50 020 and EN 50 039 apply for the construction of explosion protected electrical apparatus They were established on the basis of the IEC However these recommendations are much more detailed by comparison Zones Within IEC7 10 hazardous locations are defined into one of these three zones Description of Hazardous Location Explosive gas atmosphere is present continuously or is present for long periods Explosive gas atmosphere is likely to occur in normal operation Explosive gas atmosphere is not likely to occur in normal operation and if it does occur it will exist for a short period only IEC Groups Flammable gases vapors and mists are further classified into groups according to the energy required to ignite the most easily ignitable mixture within air Apparatus is grouped according to the atmospheres it may be used within as follows Description of Atmosphere Atmospheres containing acetylene hydrogen fuel and combustible process gases or vapors of equivalent hazard Atmospheres such as ethyl ether ethylene or gasses or vapors of equivalent hazard Atmospheres such as acetone benzene butane cyclopropane ethanol gasoline hexane methanol methane natural gas naphtha propane or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 253 A 2 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Classification of Haz
80. 03 Requirements for Process Sealing between Electrical Systems and Flammable or Combustible Process Fluids Accordingly the ST 3000 Series 100 100e 600 and 900 Smart Pressure Transmitters comply with the sealing requirements of NEC Chapter 5 Special Occupancies Article 500 Hazardous Classified Locations Classes I and Divisions 1 and 2 Article 501 Class I Locations Article 501 15 Sealing and Drainage f Drainage 3 Canned Pumps Process or Service Connections Etc Article 505 Class I Zone 0 1 and 2 Locations Article 505 16 Sealing and Drainage E Drainage 3 Canned Pumps Process or Service Connections and So Forth and the Canadian Electrical Code rules 18 092 18 108 18 158 J18 108 and J18 158 Annunciation of a primary seal failure per ANSI ISA 12 27 01 is electronic and is displayed in various forms based on the type of communication used for the particular transmitter Failure of the primary seal is considered a Critical Failure Based on testing annunciation of primary seal failure will occur in 7 hours or less The transmitter s 4 20 mA output will be driven to the selected failsafe direction upscale or downscale The transmitter s digital output DE HART Fieldbus will display any of the following responses which could indicate a primary seal failure as well as other meter body faults METER BODY FAULT MB OVERLOAD SUSPECT INPUT SENSOR FAILURE DEVICE FAILURE July 201
81. 0x0001 PROFILE 0x0101 PROFILE REVISION 0x0103 EXECUTION TIME 0 000002 0 EXECUTION PERIOD 0x00007d00 NUM OF PARAMS 0x0027 NEXT FB TO EXECUTE 0x0000 VIEWS INDEX 0 01 5 NUMBER VIEW 3 0x01 NUMBER VIEW 4 0x01 1 ST REV 0x0003 2 TAG DESC 3 STRATEGY 0x0000 4 ALERT KEY 0x01 Initialized value zero Must be set to non zero value 5 MODE TARGET Auto ACTUAL Auto PERMITTED Auto Man OOS NORMAL Auto 6 BLOCK ERR 0x0000 7 PV STATUS Good NonCascade UnacknowledgedBlockAlarm NotLimited VALUE 61 4117 8 OUT STATUS Good_NonCascade UnacknowledgedBlockAlarm NotLimited VALUE 61 4117 9 SIMULATE SIMULATE_STATUS Good_NonCascade UnacknowledgedBlockAlarm NotLimited SIMULATE_VALUE 61 4117 TRANSDUCER_STATUS Good_NonCascade UnacknowledgedBlockAlarm NotLimited TRANSDUCER_VALUE 61 4117 ENABLE_DISABLE Disabled 10 XD_SCALE EU_100 100 EU_0 0 UNITS INDEX inH2O 4 C DECIMAL 0x00 11 OUT SCALE EU 100 100 EU 0 0 UNITS INDEX inH2O 4 C DECIMAL 0x00 Continued on next page 270 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Analog Input Block Continued 12 GRANT DENY Index Parameter mnemonic Value GRANT 0x00 DENY 0x00 IO OPTS 0 0000 STATUS OPTS 0x0000 15 CHANNEL 0x0001 Initialized value zero Must be set to non zero value 16 L TYPE Direct Initialized value Uninitialized Must be set to a val
82. 1 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 257 Enclosure Ratings NEMA and IEC Recognition IEC Classifications NEMA Standards IEC Designations The NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer s Association enclosure classifications are recognized in the US The IEC Publication 529 Classifications are recognized throughout Europe and those parts of the world that use the IEC standards as a basis for product certifications The following paragraphs provide a discussion of the Comparison Between NEMA Enclosure Type Numbers and IEC Enclosure Classification Designations IEC Publication 529 Classification of Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures provides a system for specifying the enclosures of electrical equipment on the basis of the degree of protection provided by the enclosure IEC 529 does not specify degrees of protection against mechanical damage of equipment risk of explosion or conditions such as moisture produced for example by condensation corrosive vapors fungus or vermin NEMA Standards Publication 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1000 Volts Maximum does test for environmental conditions such as corrosion rust icing oil and coolants For this reason and because the tests and evaluations for other characteristics are not identical the IEC enclosure classification designations cannot be exactly equated with NEMA enclosure type numbers Basically the IEC designation
83. 2 and13 contain reference information Section 8 provides descriptions of fieldbus elements that make up the transmitter device configuration These elements are block parameters and device objects that comprise the software application of the transmitter Background information also is provided on device configuration as it relates to the ST 3000 FF application A dictionary listing of Honeywell defined parameters is given Section 12 contains figures and listings of replacement parts for all models of the ST 3000 FF transmitters Reference drawings and wiring diagrams are furnished in Section 13 Appendixes A B and C provide additional reference information on Hazardous location standards and approval body options Sample configuration printouts Recommendations for freeze protection of transmitters in cold environments ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Overview AN BLOCK ERR Indication Recommended Action ST 3000 FF Fieldbus Pressure Transmitter Operational Note This document provides important supplementary information to the ST 3000 FF Transmitter With FOUNDATION Fieldbus Option Installation and Device Reference Guide 34 ST 25 15 Specifically this document covers an important operational note which operators should be aware of IMPORTANT If the Resource Block BLOCK ERR parameter indicates that a MEMORY FAILURE is detected It is possible that are
84. 20 TABLE 5 OPERATING TEMPERATURE LIMITS TRANSMITTERS WITH SILICONE FILL FLUIDS 25 TABLE 6 ST 3000 FF POWER REQUIREMENTS ciona a eee enne tenete E nete 26 TABLE 7 TRANSMITTER MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WORKING PRESSURE MAWP RATINGS 27 TABLE 8 LOCAL METER SPECIFICATIONS mennan ne a dee cta eene 28 TABLE 9 MOUNTING ST 3000 FF TRANSMITTER TO A 2 31 TABLE 10 ZERO CORRECTS PROCEDURE FOR 110 ener 36 TABLE 11 MOUNTING REMOTE DIAPHRAGM SEAL TRANSMITTER nennen eene 40 TABLE 12 SUGGESTED TRANSMITTER LOCATION FOR GIVEN PROCESS eene 43 TABLE13 PROCESS CONNECTIONS FOR 6 0 44 TABLE 14 FLANGE DESCRIPTION sssesseseseeseeeeeeennnen eerte eene tentent rettet retener tete teen 45 TABLE15 INSTALLING FLANGE ADAPTER 2 0 22 4 10 46 TABLE 16 FOUNDATION FIELDBUS PROFILE nennen enne rennen innen 47 TABLE 17 FIELDBUS CABLE TYPES wise ertet ihe ee eee ne e RR 50 TABLE 18 ST 3000 FF WIRING TERMINALS ssssseeseeeeeenreer teen ette nnne teen 53 TABLE 19 WIRING THE TRANSMITTER E E EE E R 54 TABLE 20 TRANSMITTER POWER UP nennen enne enin entente inneren enne 57 TABLE21 TRANSMITTER CHE
85. 4 element of BLOCK TEST 2 Read BLOCK ERR See Subsection 11 7 for details on BLOCK ERR PID block is not initialized Read parameters The default values of these parameters are configuration PED errors and they must be set to a SHED OP valid range See Clearing Block Configuration Errors Subsection 11 9 Read parameters IN STATUS Should Good OUT STATUS Should Good 202 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 11 4 Transmitter Faults Transmitter Transmitter faults can be grouped into one of these three diagnostic Diagnostics categories and could cause the following results 1 Non Critical Fault Transmitter continues to calculate PV output 2 Critical Fault Transmitter drives PV output to failsafe state 3 Block Configuration Errors Incorrect parameter values may cause the transmitter to generate a fault for example BLOCK ERR or MODE BLK OS A description of each condition in each category is given in the following tables The condition is described a probable cause is stated and a recommended corrective action is given for each fault XD DIAG DETAIL The XD DIAG DETAIL parameter contains data indicating status Parameter relating to calibration the measurement software in the transducer board and the sensor See Table 80 for more details of the parameter Table 80 XD DIAG DETAIL Parameter Bit Mapping Category Transducer Status Excess zero calibration Non crit
86. 53 FAX 358 0 20752 2751 France Honeywell SA Phone 33 0 1 60198075 FAX 33 0 1 60198201 Germany Honeywell AG Phone 49 69 8064 299 FAX 49 69 806497336 Hungary Honeywell Kft Phone 36 1 451 4300 FAX 36 1 451 4343 Italy Honeywell S p A Phone 390292146307 FAX 39 0292146377 The Netherlands Honeywell B V Phone 31 0 20 5656200 FAX 31 0 20 5656210 Norway Honeywell A S Phone 45 39 55 55 55 Poland Honeywell Sp zo o Phone 48 22 6060900 FAX 48 22 6060901 Portugal Honeywell Portugal Lda Phone 351 21 424 5000 FAX 351 21 424 50 99 Romania Honeywell Bucharest Phone 40 0 21 2316437 FAX 40 0 21 2316439 Russian Federation RF Honeywell Field Solutions Kievskaya str 7 Moscow 121059 Russia Phone 7 495 796 98 60 Fax 7 495 797 99 64 Slovak Republic Honeywell s r o Phone 421 2 58247 410 FAX 421 2 58247 415 Spain Honeywell S A Phone 34 0 91313 61 00 FAX 34 0 91313 61 30 Sweden Honeywell AB Phone 46 8 775 55 00 FAX 46 8 775 56 00 Switzerland Honeywell AG Phone 41 18552448 FAX 41 1 855 24 45 Turkey Honeywell Turkey A S Phone 90 216 578 71 00 FAX 90 216 575 66 35 Ukraine Honeywell Tel 380 44 201 44 74 Fax 380 44 201 44 75 United Kingdom Honeywell Control Systems Ltd Phone 44 0 1344 655251 FAX 44 0 1344 655554 MIDDLE EAST Abu Dhabi U AE Middle East Headquarters Hon
87. 6 Viton head gaskets 30749274 004 Optional Flange Adapter Not Shown 4 30679622 501 Flange adapter gaskets Teflon 6 30749274 502 Flange adapter gaskets Viton 6 Continued on next page 230 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Figure 40 Series 100 and Series 900 LGP and LAP Meter Body Lx 9 1 Round Body Hexagonal Body Table 99 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 40 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete model number from nameplate Series 100 replacement meter body LGP model 1 Specify complete model number from nameplate Series 900 replacement meter body LGP model Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 231 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Figure 41 Series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body Table 100 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 41 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body Flush Mount model 1 model number from nameplate 30756445 508 Gasket Kit 0 rings 51204496 001 316L SS Mounting Sleeve Kit 51204497 001 Calibration Sleeve Kit Continued on next page 232 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 12 4
88. 60 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Multiple Marketing ATEX LCIE approval body certification for e Non Sparking Zone 2 5413 Ex nA IIC Ex tD A22 6 ATEX LCIE approval body certification for Intrinsically Safe Zone 0 1 amp 91 GD ia lic Ex tD A20 IP6X Flameproof Zone 1 59112 GD Ex d IIC Ex tD A21 6 Non Sparking Zone 2 ll 3GD Ex ia Ex tD A22 IP6X CERTUSP INMETRO Brazil approval body certification for Flameproof Zone 1 BR Ex d IIC e Intrinsically Safe Zone 0 1 BR Ex ia No certification July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 261 262 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Appendix B Sample Configuration Record Sample Device The following pages provide a printout example of the Function Block Configuration Application portion of a ST 3000 FF device configuration file The printout was generated using the NI FBUS configurator application and shows function block parameters and values for a typical control loop The printout is shown at the left side of the page Comments and notes on the configuration are given on the righthand side Configuration File Data Notes ST 4000636 RS 4000636 3 Device tag Block tagname Resource block Page RS 4000636 RB Block tagname Resource block 0 BLOCK INFO Index Parameter mnemonic Value BLOCK TAG 5
89. 67 MSG FLANGE 011D012 Model Selection Guide Flange Type 68 MSG OPTIONS 1 Model Selection Guide Options Selection 69 MSG OPTIONS 2 Model Selection Guide Options Selection Continued on next page 266 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 ST 4000636 XD 4000636 STTB 6 Device tag Block tagname Transducer block Page XD 4000636 STTB Block tagname Transducer block 0 BLOCK INFO Index Parameter mnemonic Value BLOCK TAG XD 4000636 DD MEMBER 0x00000000 DD ITEM 0x00020000 DD REVIS 0x0001 PROFILE 0x0000 PROFILE REVISION 0x0103 EXECUTION TIME 0x00000000 EXECUTION PERIOD 0x00007d00 NUM OF PARAMS 0x001d NEXT FB TO EXECUTE 0x0000 VIEWS INDEX 0x01f1 NUMBER VIEW 3 0x01 NUMBER VIEW 4 0x01 1 ST REV 0x0000 2 TAG DESC 3 STRATEGY 0x0000 4 ALERT KEY 0x00 5 MODE TARGET Auto ACTUAL Auto PERMITTED Auto OOS NORMAL Auto 6 BLOCK ERR 0x0000 7 UPDATE EVT UNACKNOWLEDGED Uninitialized UPDATE_STATE Uninitialized TIME_STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS STATIC_REVISION 0x0000 RELATIVE_INDEX 0x0000 8 ALARM_SUM CURRENT 0x0000 UNACKNOWLEDGED Block Alm Unack UNREPORTED Block Alm Unrep DISABLED 0x0000 9 BLOCK_ALM UNACKNOWLEDGED Unacknowledged ALARM_STATE Clear Not Reported TIME STAMP 08 05 98 15 39 19 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB_CODE OutOfService VALUE 0x00 10 PRIMARY_VALUE STATUS
90. 8 Fax 86 21 6237 2826 Taiwan R O C Honeywell Taiwan Ltd Phone 886 2 2245 1000 China Chengdu FAX 886 2 2245 Honeywell China Inc 3243 Phone 86 28 6613 5078 E Asi ntri Fax 86 28 8678 7061 S sia Countries see Honeywell Pte Ltd Singapore for Philippines Pakistan Cambodia Guam Laos China PRC Xi an Honeywell China Ltd Xi an Myanmar Vietnam Phone 86 29 8833 dad East Timor Fax 86 29 8833 7489 SE Asia Countries see Honeywell Ching PRC Shenzhen ul c oo indiai for Honeywell China Inc Phone 86 755 2518 Bangladesh 1226 Nepal Fax 86 755 2518 1221 Sri Lanka Indonesia EUROPE PT Honeywell Indonesia Austria Phone 62 21 535 8833 FAX 62 21 5367 1008 Honeywell Austria GmbH Phone 43 316 400123 FAX 43 316 40017 Honeywell Automation India Ltd Belgium Honeywell Ltd Honeywell SA NV Phone 91 6603 9400 Phone 32 0 2728 24 Fax 91 6603 9600 07 FAX 32 0 2728 22 45 Japan Honeywell Inc Phone 81 3 6730 7197 Fax 81 3 6730 7228 Bulgaria Honeywell EOOD Phone 359 2 40 20 900 Malaysia FAX 359 2 40 20 990 Honeywell Engineering Sdn Bhd Czech Republic Phone 603 7958 4788 Fax 603 7958 8922 Honeywell spol s r o Phone 420 242 442 232 FAX 420 242 442 131 Denmark Honeywell A S Phone 45 39 55 55 55 FAX 45 39 55 55 58 Finland Honeywell OY Phone 358 0 20752 27
91. American Classification of Hazardous Locations Continued Examples Groups Given the criteria above the following examples are made A Class IIL Division 1 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers or material processing combustible flyings are handled manufactured or used A Class IIL Division 2 location is a location in which easily ignitable fibers are stored or handled Flammable gases vapors and ignitable dusts fibers and flyings are classified into groups according to the energy required to ignite the most easily ignitable mixture within air Group classifications are as follows Description of Atmosphere Atmospheres containing acetylene Atmospheres containing hydrogen fuel and combustible process gases containing more than 30 percent hydrogen by volume or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard Atmospheres such as ethyl ether ethylene or gasses or vapors of equivalent hazard Atmospheres such as acetone ammonia benzene butane cyclopropane ethanol gasoline hexane methanol methane natural gas naphtha propane or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard Class II Description Group E Atmospheres containing combustible metal dusts including aluminum magnesium and their commercial alloys and other metals of similarly hazardous characteristics F Atmospheres containing combustible carbonaceous dusts including carbon black charcoal coal or other dusts that have been sensitized
92. Approval Body Requirements 56 CE Confromity Europe 2 Installation drawings 238 B Barrier Diaphragms cleaning and inspecting 168 Block Parameter Summary 116 BLOCK ERR parameter xxiii 196 199 204 205 208 211 214 BLOCK ERR Parameter mapping 209 C Calibration 183 Calibration Parameters 86 Calibration procedures Two point calibration 789 Calibration Procedures Calibrate Zero 793 clear 191 Local Zero Correction 94 restore factory calibration 190 Capillary tubes 40 Code Download Utility 181 Configuration Block errors 2 7 default parameters 64 off line 19 Sample device configuration 262 Critical faults 207 208 D Default parameters 84 Device Application Alert objects 131 Device Description DD 135 Domain objects 134 Link objects 122 Management VFD 141 Network Management 149 Object Dictionary OD 137 System Management SM 142 Trend objects 733 View objects 123 INDEX Device Calibration 19 Device Description DD 135 Device tag 146 Device Tags 60 61 Diagnostics 208 BLOCK ERR parameter 208 211 BLOCK TEST parameter 208 ERROR DETAIL parameter 270 XD DIAG DETAIL parameter 203 Diaphragm Seals 279 Dimension Drawings 239 Electric Heating 281 Enclosure ratings 259 Enclosure Ratings 258 Establish Communications 21 Establishing Communications 62 F Fieldbus cable types 50 Network wiring 47 overview 7 wiring limitations 50 wiring schem
93. CKOUT TASKS essen eene enne en 60 TABLE22 TRANSMITTER IDENTIFICATION nennen inneren innen 62 TABLE 23 CREATING AN EBXAP e hp de pes eo oe Re voL oe ERE 65 TABLE 24 HOW TO SET WRITE PROTECT JUMPER sees 67 TABLE25 WRITE PROTECT JUMPER SETTINGS cece ceececsseceeeeecsseceeececaeceeeeecnaeceeeeecsaeceeneecaeceeneecnaeeeenees 68 TABLE 26 WRITE PROTECT FEATURE TRUTH TABLE 4 eene nennen enne 69 TABLE27 ST 3000 FF OPERATING TASK LIST sse ener entente trennen terrent 71 TABLE28 DESCRIPTION OF DISPLAY INDICATORS SHOWN IN FIGURE 25 eene 75 TABLE29 SUMMARY OF TYPICAL LOCAL SMART METER INDICATIONS eee 76 TABLE 30 LOCAL METER FAULT INDICATIONS eese enne 77 TABLE 31 CHANGING LOCAL METER DISPLAY 5 78 TABLE32 FUNCTION BLOCK APPLICATION PROCESS ELEMENTS sese 82 TABLE 33 BLOCK PARAMETER LIST COLUMN DESCRIPTION eese 84 TABLE 34 RESOURCE BLOCK PARAMETERS sse tentent rennen trennen teen nent 85 TABLE 35 RESOURCE BLOCK PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS eese 88 TABLE36 TRANSDUCER BLOCK nene entente innen 90 TABLE 37 TRANSDUCER BLOCK PARAMETER 8
94. CLE 0x01b77400millisec 24 FREE SPACE 0 15 25 68 493 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 26 SHED RCAS 0x00007d00millisec 27 6 ROUT 0x00001f40millisec 28 FAULT STATE Clear 29 SET FSTATE OFF 30 CLR FSTATE Off 31 NOTIFY 0x08 32 LIM NOTIFY 0x08 33 CONFIRM TIME 0x00007d00millisec 34 WRITE Not Locked 35 UPDATE EVT UNACKNOWLEDGED Uninitialized UPDATE_STATE Uninitialized TIME STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS STATIC_REVISION 0x0000 RELATIVE_INDEX 0x0000 264 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Resource Block Continued 36 BLOCK ALM Index Parameter mnemonic Value UNACKNOWLEDGED Unacknowledged ALARM STATE Active Not Reported TIME STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB CODE SimulationActive VALUE 0x00 37 ALARM SUM CURRENT Block Alarm UNACKNOWLEDGED Block Alm Unack UNREPORTED Block Alm Unrep DISABLED 0x0000 38 ACK OPTION 0x0000 39 WRITE PRI 0x00 40 WRITE ALM UNACKNOWLEDGED Uninitialized ALARM_STATE Uninitialized TIME STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB_CODE Other VALUE Discrete state 0 41 ITK_VER 42 DL_CMD1 0x00 43 DL_CMD2 0x00 44 DL_APPSTATE 0x0000 45 DL_SIZE 0x00034d68 46 DL_CHECKSUM 0x83ef 47 REVISION_ARRAY REVISION_ARRAY
95. Cascade Notlnvited NotLimited VALUE 0 37 TRK_SCALE EU_100 100 UNITS_INDEX 0x0000 DECIMAL 0x00 38 TRK_IN_D STATUS Bad OutOfService NotLimited VALUE Discrete state 0 39 TRK_VAL STATUS Bad OutOfService NotLimited VALUE 0 28 29 30 31 2 Dove Continued on next page 274 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 40 FF VAL STATUS Bad OutOfService NotLimited VALUE 0 41 FF_SCALE EU_100 100 EU_0 0 UNITS_INDEX 0x0000 DECIMAL 0x00 42 FF_GAIN 0 43 UPDATE_EVT UNACKNOWLEDGED Unacknowledged UPDATE_STATE Not Reported TIME STAMP 08 05 98 14 45 59 MM DD YY HH MM SS 5 REVISION 0x0004 RELATIVE INDEX 0x0018 44 BLOCK ALM UNACKNOWLEDGED Uninitialized ALARM STATE Uninitialized TIME STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB CODE Other VALUE 0x00 45 ALARM SUM CURRENT 0x0000 UNACKNOWLEDGED 0x0000 UNREPORTED 0x0000 DISABLED 0x0000 46 ACK_OPTION 0x0000 47 ALARM_HYS 0 5 48 HI_HI_PRI 0x00 49 HI HI 1 4INF 50 PRI 0x00 51 1 4INF 52 LO PRI 0x00 53 LO 1 4INF 54 LO LO PRI 0x00 55 LO LO 1 INF 56 DV HI PRI 0x00 57 DV HI LIM 1 INF 58 DV LO PRI 0x00 59 DV LO LIM 1 4INF 60 HI ALM UNACKNOWLEDGED Uninitialized ALARM STATE Uninitialized TIME STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB CODE Oth
96. Continued Supported Features features supported by system management include the key features listed above as well as the ones designated in Table 59 The object SM SUPPORT indicates which features are supported by system management in the FBAP The features are mapped to the bits in the bit string shown below Table 60 System Management Supported Features SM SUPPORT Supported bit ett eve ass mgt Dnm o aestu etn deka tinea SM_SUPPORT Bits Any bit of the object SM SUPPORT will be set which corresponds to a supported feature in the table above The resulting value in the object SM SUPPORT is hex Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 143 8 18 System Management SM Continued SM Agent Objects Four SM agent objects are contained in the SMIB object dictionary One object SM SUPPORT was described previously The three other objects are timers associated with SM operations Table 60 identifies the SM Agent objects with their object directory index and default values Table 61 SM Agent Objects SM SUPPORT Variable which indicates the features supported by SM in 258 Ox1C1F this device See Table 58 T1 Value of the SM step timer in 1 32 of a millisecond ticks 259 96 000 3 seconds T2 Value of the SM set address sequence timer in 1 32 of a 260 1 920 000 millisecond tic
97. Drawing Key Number Selections Angle Bracket MB SB Flat Bracket FB Number Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Gauge and Absolute Pressure STG944 STG974 See Key Number 51500411 51500409 Column 51500410 51500408 lt STG140 STG170 STG180 See Key Number 51500362 51500360 STA122 STA140 Column 5500361 51500359 STA922 STA940 51500366 515004364 51500365 51500363 STG14L STG17L STG18L 51500373 51500371 lt STA12L STA14L 51500372 51500370 STG90L STG94L STG97L 51500377 51500375 lt STG98L SAT92L STA94L 51500376 51500374 STG14T High Temperature 72 51404482 Continued on next page 240 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 13 2 Dimension Drawings Continued Table 105 Dimension Drawings Series 100 and Series 900 continued Transmitter Type and Table Drawing Key Number Selections Number Flange Mount STF128 STF132 Table Il Flush 51500404 0 1 0 0 2F0 0 Table Il Extended 51500405 050 Table Z Sanitary 51500418 Table Il 050 0 STF924 STF932 Table II Flush 51500406 0 1F0 0 2 0 0 Table Extended 51500407 050 Tablel Z__ Sanitary 51500419 Table 11050 0 STF12F STF13F 51500420 STF92F STF93F 51500421 STF14F Tank HTG 30756436 000 30755981 000 STF14T High Temperature 75 1 1 2 and 51404481 2 inch
98. E 53 VIEW LIST FOR RESOURCE BLOCK PARAMETERS eere 124 TABLE 54 VIEW LIST FOR TRANSDUCER BLOCK PARAMETERS 2 126 TABLE 55 VIEW LIST FOR AI FUNCTION BLOCK PARAMETERS eere enne 128 TABLE 56 VIEW LIST FOR PID CONTROL FUNCTION BLOCK 129 TABLE 57 ST3000FF OBJECT DICTIONARY iiseeeeeeeeennen eene tentent ete 138 TABLE 58 BLOCK PARAMETER INDEX 0022 0 0 6 000000000000000000000000 139 TABLE 59 ST 3000 FF SMIB OBJECT DICTIONARY 142 TABLE 60 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT SUPPORTED FEATURES eese nennen eene ee 143 TABLE 61 SM AGENT 144 TABLE 62 SM SYNC AND SCHEDULING OBJECTS 000 ccccccccccccsscscesecssesecsscescsscescesecssesecsscsecsaseasescssseaseassatenes 145 TABLE 63 SM ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT 146 TABLE 64 FUNCTION BLOCK SCHEDULING OBJECTS eene nnne nennen eren 148 TABLE 65 ST 3000 NMIB OBJECT DICTIONARY sseeeeeeeenee 150 TABLE 65 INSPECTING AND CLEANING BARRIER DIAPHRAGMS eee e eren enne 168 TABLE 66 PROCESS HEAD BOLT TORQUE RATINGS cccccccccccsssssssseeecsscesceseescesecssesecsassecacescsaecseesecseeseeaes 171 TABLE 67 REPLACING SMART METER A
99. Flange Flush Mount STG93P 51404716 000 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 241 13 2 Dimension Drawings Continued Table 105 Dimension Drawings Series 100 and Series 900 continued Transmitter Type and Table Mounting Drawing Key Number Selections Angle Bracket MB SB Flat Bracket FB Number Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Pipe Pipe Pipe Pipe Remote Seals STR14A 51500415 51500413 51500414 51500412 lt STR12D STR13D Table 2 _ 51500399 51500397 51500398 51500396 Table 51500403 51500401 a 0 51500402 51500400 STR12D Tablel D 51500386 STR93D Table 51500395 51500393 lt dee Be 51500394 51500392 Table 2 51500391 51500389 lt 51500390 51500388 Table 2 or 51402418 6 000 STR14G STR17G 51500381 51500379 lt 51500380 51500378 lt STR14G STR17G STR94G Table 51402418 22 6 000 STR94G 51500385 51500383 lt 51500384 51500382 STR94G Tablel D 51500387 See next page for reference Continued on next page 242 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 13 2 Dimension Drawings Continued Table 105 Transmitter Type and Table Selections Dimension Drawings Series 100 and Series 900 continued Mountin
100. Honeywell ST 3000 FF Transmitter With FOUNDATION Fieldbus Option Installation amp Device Reference Guide 34 ST 25 15 July 2011 Honeywell Process Solutions Copyright Notices and Trademarks Copyright 2011 by Honeywell Inc Revision July 2011 While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect special or consequential damages The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice This document was prepared using Information Mapping methodologies and formatting principles TDC 3000 SFC Smartline and ST 3000 are U S registered trademarks of Honeywell Inc FOUNDATION Fieldbus is a trademark of the Fieldbus Foundation Information Mapping is a trademark of Information Mapping Inc Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation Honeywell Process Solutions 512 Virginia Drive Fort Washington PA 19034 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 About This Publication This manual is intended as a how to reference for installing piping wiring configuring starting up op
101. IMAL 0x00 11 OUT_SCALE EU_100 100 EU_0 0 UNITS_INDEX 0x0000 DECIMAL 0x00 12 GRANT_DENY GRANT 0x00 DENY 0x00 13 CONTROL_OPTS 0x0000 14 STATUS_OPTS 0x0000 1 2 3 4 5 Block tagname PID Control block Page Block tagname PID Control block Index Parameter mnemonic Value PID Control Block Continued July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 273 15 IN Index Parameter mnemonic Value STATUS Good NonCascade UnacknowledgedBlockAlarm NotLimited VALUE 61 0979 16 PV FTIME 0Sec 17 BYPASS Off Initialized value Uninitialized Must be set to a valid value 18 CAS IN STATUS Bad OutOfService NotLimited VALUE 0 SP RATE DN 1 4INFPV Sec SP RATE UP 1 4 INFPV Sec 21 SP HI LIM 100 22 SP LO LIM 0 19 23 GAIN 1 20 24 RESET 505 25 BAL TIME 0Sec 26 RATE 0Sec 27 BKCAL IN STATUS Good Cascade NonSpecific NotLimited VALUE 0 OUT HI LIM 100 OUT LO LIM 0 BKCAL HYS 0 5 BKCAL OUT STATUS Good Cascade Notlnvited LowLimited VALUE 46 32 RCAS IN STATUS Bad OutOfService NotLimited VALUE 0 33 ROUT_IN STATUS Bad OutOfService NotLimited VALUE 0 34 SHED_OPT NormalShed_NormalReturn Initialized value Uninitialized Must be set to a valid value 35 RCAS_OUT STATUS Good Cascade Notlnvited LowLimited VALUE 46 36 ROUT_OUT STATUS Good
102. If you want to enable the write protect feature or change the operating mode of the transmitter to simulation input you must change hardware jumpers on the internal electronics boards This requires that the power be removed from the transmitter See Sections 6 6 Setting Write Protect Feature and 11 10 Simulation Parameter for details To apply power to the fieldbus network perform the steps in Table 19 Table 20 Transmitter Power m Procedure Turn on all power supplies that DC power to the fieldbus network Verify that the polarity at the transmitter terminals is correct Verify that the voltage at the transmitter terminals is within the limits as listed in Table 5 in Section 4 Use a digital voltmeter and measure the DC voltage across the and SIGNAL terminals of the ST 3000 FF transmitter July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 57 Section 6 Transmitter Start up 6 1 Introduction About this Section This section includes these topics Section Topic See Page 6 1 Introduction s e eaae a aarete e E N a aa 55 6 2 ST 3000 FF 8 2 2 00020 002000 50000014 56 6 3 Checking Out the Transmitter 0 40 57 6 4 Verify Communications with Transmitter 59 6 5 Function Block Application Process 61 6 6 Setting Write Protect Feature
103. Meter Body f Flex Tape O ring Process head Process head Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown in Table 68 in sequence shown in following illustration Tighten head bolts in stages of 1 3 full torque 2 3 full torque and then full torque Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 179 9 5 Replacing Meter Body Continued Procedure continued Table 68 Replacing Meter Body Only continued Step Action 10 Feed flex tape on new meter body through neck of housing and screw new meter body into housing until bottom of header portion of center section is approximately flush with neck of electronics housing 11 Tighten outside set screw to be sure it is fully seated in slot in header Loosen set screw half turn rotate housing to desired position and tighten set screw 12 Perform Steps 8 through 11 in Table 67 13 Restore power to transmitter 14 Verify transmitter s configuration data Perform configuration download if applicable 15 The manufacturer s sensor serial number is located on the tag attached to the meter body Record the new PROM serial number 16 Recalibrate transmitter Refer to Section 10 If calibration is not possible the transmitter can be returned to default calibration by following the procedure in Section 10 3 Clear Calibration Do not use CAL RESTORE for recalibration
104. N This is a special non volatile parameter which is updated to the internal non volatile memory on write gt gt 0 2 42 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 109 87 PID Function Block Continued Table 42 PID Control Function Block Parameters continued pes Data Type Structure Ee Value Floatngpont s o 39 BKCALHYS Floating pont s 95 3 ROS IN Value ana Status N 3s Value ana Status fot D sao orr dumme S 9 35 Roas Value and Status D 36 Rout our ana Status fot D s TRKScALE 51959 39 TRKIND Vawe ana Saus asore N 3 TRKVA ana Status fot N 4 FFVAL ana Status onn femnapm S o 45 UPDATE EVT Evm wdss Jof 4 D 45 ALARM SUM Mam smmay D o 46 ACK OPTION Bis 10 4 9 Unsigned S SO E Usgem 0 Floating pont s WF amp ume S 9 5 S NF 5 umge 9 5 S 9 6 5 D 6 Names Jof amp vnam
105. NCE WHERE TO FIND INFORMATION IN THIS MANUAL WHERE TO FIND INFORMATION IN THIS MANUAL CONTINUED ST 3000 FF FIELDBUS PRESSURE TRANSMITTER OPERATIONAL NOTE IMPORTANT IMPORTANT BEFORE YOU BEGIN PLEASE NOTE XVI XVII XVIII XVIII XIX XX XXI XXI XXI XXII XXII July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide Contents SECTION 1 ST 3000 FF DESCRIPTION 1 1 1 Introduction 1 1 2 CE Conformity 2 1 3 ST 3000 FF Transmitters 3 1 4 Fieldbus Overview 7 1 5 Transmitter Order 10 1 6 Local Meter Option 11 SECTION 2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW 13 24 Introduction 13 2 2 Advanced Diagnostics 14 2 3 Installation Components 16 2 4 Installation Operation Tasks 18 SECTION 3 OFF LINE CONFIGURATION OPTIONAL 19 3 1 Introduction 19 32 Off line Configuration 20 SECTION 4 PRE INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS 23 4 1 Introduction 23 4 2 Considerations for ST 3000 FF Transmitter 24 4 3 Considerations for Local Meter Option 28 SECTION 5 TRANSMITTER INSTALLATION 29 5 1 Introduction 29 5 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter 30 5 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter 42 5 4 Wiring ST 3000 FF Transmitter 47 5 5 Power Up Transmitter 57 vi ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Contents SECTION 6 TRANSMITTER START UP 58 6 1 Introduction 58 6 2 ST 3000 FF Communications 59 6 3 Checking Out the Transmitter 60 6 4 Verify Communications with Transmitter 62 6 5 Function Block Appl
106. ND ELECTRONICS MODULE eee 172 TABLE 68 REPLACING METER BODY ONLY 2 2 11 20000000000000000000000000 0 000 177 TABLE 69 CODE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURE ette eene e 181 TABLE 70 TRANSDUCER BLOCK CALIBRATION PARAMETERS eere nennen nennen 186 TABLE 71 LOW AND HIGH TRIM POINT LIMITS FOR ST 3000 FF TRANSMITTERS 188 TABLE 72 TWO POINT SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE eere ener enne nnns 189 TABLE 73 RESTORING FACTORY SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE rre 190 TABLE 74 CLEARING SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE eene e ennemis 192 TABLE 75 CORRECT ZERO SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE eere nennen 193 TABLE 76 LOCAL ZERO CORRECTION PROCEDURE eene nnne rennen trennen 194 TABLE 77 DEVICE TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE A eher nennen en enhn nee eene than A 197 TABLE 78 DEVICE TROUBLESHOOTING 20 022000 1 00000000000000000000 198 TABLE 79 DEVICE TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE C esee 199 TABLE 80 DIAG DETAIL PARAMETER BIT MAPPING nennen nennen enne en 203 TABLE 81 IDENTIFYING CRITICAL AND NON CRITICAL DEVICE FAULTS rr 204 TABLE 82 SUMMARY OF NON CRITICAL 5 2 0022 00 000000000000000000000000 206 TABLE 83 SUMMARY OF CRITICAL FAULTS esee eren nnne trennen trennen ener
107. OL eee eene 283 FIGURE C 7 PIPING INSTALLATION FOR PROCESS PRESSURE TRANSMITTER AND IMPULSE PIPING WITH ELECTRIC HEATING 0 284 FIGURE C 8 PIPING INSTALLATION FOR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER AND IMPULSE PIRING WITH STEAM HEATING cin neci tertie ne HR RETO HR YD RU TE 287 FIGURE C 9 PIPING INSTALLATION FOR PROCESS PRESSURE TRANSMITTER AND IMPULSE PIPING WITH STEAM AEAN Oa erret t eee ette tens 288 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide Alarm Analog Input function Al block Application Block Configuration of a system or device Device Device Description Device Description Language Device Tag Event Field Device FOUNDATION Fieldbus Function Block Function Block Application Process Link Active Scheduler Macrocycle Manufacturer s Signal Processing DD DDL FF FB FBAP LAS MSP ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS Abbreviation Definition The detection of a block leaving a particular state and when it returns back to that state One of the standard function blocks define by the Foundation Fieldbus A software program that interacts with blocks events and objects One application may interface with other applications or contain more than one application A logical software unit that makes up one named copy of a block and the associated
108. OR MODELS STD924 amp STD930 A B E F AND J 226 FIGURE 38 SERIES 100 GP AND AP METER BODIES AND SERIES 900 AP METER BODY 228 FIGURE 39 SERIES 900 DUAL HEAD GP METER BODIES nnne 230 FIGURE 40 SERIES 100 AND SERIES 900 LGP AND LAP METER 2 231 FIGURE 41 SERIES 900 FLUSH MOUNT METER 44 2 0 0 000040000000008000000000000000050800000 232 FIGURE 42 SERIES 100 AND SERIES 900 FLANGE MOUNTED METER 233 FIGURE 43 HIGH TEMPERATURE METER BODY 235 FIGURE C 1 PIPING INSTALLATION FOR SEALING LIQUID WITH SPECIFIC GRAVITY HEAVIER THAN PROCESS FLUID vais Oe die dup ac 278 FIGURE C 2 PIPING INSTALLATION FOR SEALING LIQUID WITH SPECIFIC GRAVITY LIGHTER THAN PROCESS JELUID nett et de Redi tae etes 279 FIGURE C 3 PIPING INSTALLATION FOR GAS 280 xiv ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 FIGURE 4 PIPING INSTALLATION FOR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER WITH METAL DIAPHRAGM SEALS rrr a iem aO Hp Iona or 281 FIGURE C 5 PIPING INSTALLATION FOR PROCESS PRESSURE TRANSMITTER WITH METAL DIAPHRAGM E E e cente eii t pore eee ien rare e ee Farbe eere 282 FIGURE C 6 PIPING INSTALLATION FOR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER AND IMPULSE PIPING WITH ELECTRIC HEATING AND CONTR
109. POWER_CYCLES N A F F F F F F Parameter 4 POWER_CYCLES_DATE N A F F F F F F Parameter 5 VOLTAGE N A 0 0 Note 6 0 0 Note 6 F F Parameter 6 VOLTAGE_MIN N A 0 0 Note 6 0 0 Note 6 F F Parameter 7 VOLTAGE_MIN_DATE N A 1 1 72 Note 6 1 1 72 Note 6 F F Parameter 8 EL TEMPERATURE N A 0 0 Note 6 0 0 Note 6 F F Parameter Electronics Temperature Tracking 9 EL TEMP_OVER_RNG_CTR N A 0 Note 6 0 Note 6 F F Parameter 10 EL TEMP_OVER_RNG_DATE N A 1 1 72 Note 6 1 1 72 Note 6 F F Parameter 11 EL TEMP_UNDER_RNG_CTR N A 0 Note 6 0 Note 6 F F Parameter 12 EL TEMP_UNDER_RNG_DATE N A 1 1 72 Note 6 1 1 72 Note 6 F F Parameter 13 EL TEMP MAX N A 0 0 Note 6 0 0 Note 6 F F Parameter 14 EL TEMP MIN N A 0 0 Note 6 0 0 Note 6 F F Parameter 15 MSG KEY NUMBER N A Note 2 F F F F Parameter 16 MSG METER BODY N A Note 2 F F F F Parameter 17 MSG FLANGE N A Note 2 F F F F Parameter 18 MSG OPTIONS 1 N A Note 2 F F F F Parameter 19 MSG OPTIONS 2 N A Note 2 F F F F Parameter 20 Device SW Revisions N A F F F F F F Method 21 Device RS Block Information N A F F F F F F Method Materials of Construction 22 Model Number N A Note 2 F F F F Method 23 Device Key Number and Meter Body N A Note 2 F F F F Method Information 24 Device Flange Assembly Information N A Note 2 F F F F Method 14 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Table 1 Advanced Diagnostic Feature Availability b Firmware Hardware Revision Combinatio
110. Pmax or gt 250 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Reference ST 3000FF Control Drawing 51204301 Attached Table 1 ST 3000 FIELDBUS TRANSMITTER Class Zone 0 AEx ia ENTITY FISCO IS Class 1 Division 1 Groups A B C D E F amp G ENTITY FISCO Units ENTITY Barrier where ENTITY Barrier where Suitable for Po lt 0 84 W Po lt 1 2 W FISCO systems Ui 32 VDC 24 VDC 17 5 VDC li 120 mA DC 250 mA DC 380 mA DC Pi 0 84 W 1 2 W 5 32 W Li 0 0 0 4 2 nF 4 2 nF 4 2 nF T4 Tamb lt 40 C Tamb lt 40 C Tamb lt 40 C T3 Tamb lt 93 C Tamb lt 93 C Tamb lt 93 C Table 2 ST 3000 Class Zone 2 AEx nA IIC ENTITY FNICO NI Class Division 2 Groups A B C amp D ENTITY FNICO Units No barrier Ui 32 VDC Li 0 4 2 nF T4 Tamb lt 40 T3 Tamb lt 93 C July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 251 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations Continued FNICO Concept Nonincendive for Class I Division 2 and Zone Hazardous Locations Conventional Nonincendive practice does require cable parameters to be calculated and the voltage and current values of apparatus to be matched In the case of North American approvals the V I C and L values are stated in the nonincendive field wiring parameters which are part of t
111. Replacement Parts Continued Figure 42 Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body eoe 1 coo 0 1 Extended Flange Design Pseudo Flange Design Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 233 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Table 101 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 42 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body 1 model number from nameplate Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body 1 model number from nameplate 2 30749372 005 O ring seal 1 3 30749372 001 O ring seal 1 7 7 Optional Flange Adapter Not Shown 30754419 006 Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts 30754419 008 Flange adapter kit Monel flange adapter with carbon steel bolts 30754419 022 Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapter with 316 st steel bolts 30754419 024 Flange adapter kit Monel flange adapter with 316 st steel bolts K1 Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg 2 K2 Flange adapter 1 K3 Gasket 1 K4 Filter screen 1 30754419 007 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapter with carbon steel bolts 30754419 023 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapter
112. SS NACE bolts and 302 304 SS NACE nuts kit Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg flange adapter 4 K4 Nut hex metric M12 process heads 4 K8 Bolt hex head metric M12 90mm lg process heads 4 30753785 001 St steel vent drain and plug kit K1 Pipe plug 4 K2 Vent plug all except model STD110 2 K3 Vent bushing all except model STD110 2 30753787 001 Monel vent drain and plug kit K1 Pipe plug 4 K2 Vent plug all except model STD110 2 K3 Vent bushing all except model STD110 2 30753786 001 Hastelloy C vent drain and plug kit K1 Pipe plug 4 K2 Vent plug all except model STD110 2 K3 Vent bushing all except model STD110 2 30753788 003T Process head gasket kit PTFE material 30753788 004T Process head gasket kit for Viton material K6 Head gasket For gasket only 30756445 501 PTFE quantity 12 or 6 30749274 501 6 Viton head O rings and 6 Vition flange adapter O rings K7 O ring 3 K9 Gasket flange adapter for gasket only 30679622 501 6 Teflon or 6 30749274 002 6 Viton Continued on next page 224 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Table 94 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 36 continued Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit Optional Flange Adapter Kits two heads Not Shown 30754419 002 Flange adapter kit st st
113. Section 11 Troubleshooting INSTALL DATE Time and date of device installation TIME IN SERVICE Summation of time in mimutes that power has been applied to the device since leaving the factory POWER CYCLES Total number of power ups experienced by the unit POWER CYCLES Displays date and time of the last power up DATE VOLTAGE Supply operating voltage available at device terminals 88 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 VOLTAGE MIN Minimum operating voltage experienced by device at terminals since last reset of operating voltage parameters via method VOLTAGE MIN DA Displays date and time that last minimum operating voltage event occurred User TE can reset as desired using method EL TEMPERATURE Electronics Temperature temperature inside the electronics housing EL TEMP OVER Accumulation of minutes that device s electronics temperature has been above the value of maximum specification limit less 1096 of range Example 85 C 12 5 C 72 5 C EL TEMP OVER R Date and time when electronics temperature last passed below the value of NG DATE maximum specification limit less 1096 of range Example 85 12 5 C 72 5 EL TEMP UNDER Accumulation of minutes that device s electronics temperature has been below RNG CTR the value of minimum specification limit plus 1096 of range Example 40 C 12 5 27 5 EL TEMP UNDER Date and time when electronics te
114. TIFICATION FOR CALLOUTS IN 42 2 2 2 234 TABLE 102 PARTS IDENTIFICATION FOR CALLOUTS IN FIGURE 43 eee 235 TABLE 103 SUMMARY OF RECOMMENDED SPARE 5 237 TABLE 104 EXTERNAL WIRING DIAGRAMS sees eene enne entente entente sten tentent entente nenne 238 TABLE 105 DIMENSION DRAWINGS SERIES 100 AND SERIES 900 eene 239 TABLE A 1 FACTORY MUTUAL FM ENTITY 5 248 TABLE A 2 CSACENTILY PARAMETERS ohio etie Met eter ede aO pen 249 TABLE A 3 CENELEC LCIE CERTIFICATION ERROR BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED TABLE A 4 STANDARDS AUSTRALIA LOSC CERTIFICATIONERROR BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED TABLE A 5 ZONE 2 EUROPE DECLARATION OF CONFORMITYERROR BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED TABLE A 6 NEMA ENCLOSURE TYPE NUMBERS AND COMPARABLE IEC ENCLOSURE CILASSIBICATION te cee dant ee ee eset dea OI e nO 259 TABLE C 1 TEMPERATURE RANGE OF FREEZE PROTECTION SYSTEMS enn 286 TABLE C 2 STEAM PRESSURE VERSUS STEAM TEMPERATURE VALUES ee 290 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide xiii Figures FIGURE 1 TYPICAL ST 3000 FF DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE 3 FIGURE 2 FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM OF ST 3000 FF TRANSMITTER OPERATION 4 FIGURE 3 ST 3000 FF PRESSURE TRANSMITTER FAMILY nenne
115. TS INDEX in the transducer block When CHANNEL 2 the XD SCALE UNITS INDEX must be set to engineering units of percent L TYPE The state Direct or Indirect which values are passed from the transducer block to the AI block e WhenL TYPE Direct Values are passed directly from the transducer block to the AI block No units conversion When L TYPE Indirect Values from the transducer block are in different units and must be converted either linearly Indirect or in square root Ind Sqr Root using the range defined by the transducer and the OUT SCALE range Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 105 8 6 Analog Input Function Block Continued XD SCALE Range PV Value Al OUT In the AI block XD SCALE values are used when 1 TYPE is set to Indirect which converts the signal to other units See L TYPE in Table 39 The high and low scale values of XD SCALE EU 100 and EU 0 define the range over which the AI OUT will show Good status e WhenL TYPE is set to either Indirect or Direct XD SCALE units must match the transducer PRIMARY VALUE RANGE units CHANNEL 1 Therefore the high and low scale values of XD SCALE would normally be set equal to or within the transducer PRIMARY VALUE RANGE range When L TYPE is set to Direct it is recommended that XD SCALE and OUT SCALE should contain the same values The AI block PV value is the same as the transd
116. Table 31 Al s block record is at index 257 in the OD Table 41 Therefore OUT of the AI block is at index 257 8 265 in the OD ST 3000 FF Block Table 57 lists the index numbers for all block parameters defined in the Parameter Index FBAP for ST 3000 FF Table 58 Block Parameter Index Table BLOCK BYPASS BLOCK EL TEMP OVER RNG DATE ST REV CAS IN ST REV EL TEMP UNDER RNG CTR TAG DESC SP RATE DN TAG DESC EL TEMP UNDER RNG DATE STRATEGY SP RATE UP STRATEGY EL TEMP MAX ALERT KEY SP HI LIM ALERT KEY EL TEMP MIN MODE BLK SP LO LIM MODE BLK MSG KEY NUMBER BLOCK ERR GAIN BLOCK ERR MSG METER BODY RESET RS STATE MSG FLANGE BAL TIME TEST RW MSG OPTIONS 1 SIMULATE DD RESOURCE MSG OPTIONS 2 XD SCALE BKCAL IN MANUFAC ID et Transducer Block OUT SCALE OUT HI LIM DEV TYPE BLOCK GRANT DENY OUT LO LIM DEV REV ST REV 10 OPTS BKCAL HYS DD REV TAG DESC STATUS OPTS BKCAL OUT GRANT DENY STRATEGY CHANNEL RCAS IN HARD TYPES ALERT KEY L TYPE ROUT IN RESTART MODE BLK LOW CUT SHED OPT FEATURES BLOCK ERR PV FTIME RCAS OUT FEATURE SEL UPDATE EVT FIELD VAL ROUT OUT CYCLE TYPE ALARM SUM UPDATE EVT TRK SCALE CYCLE SEL BLOCK ALM BLOCK ALM TRK IN D MIN CYCLE T PRIMARY VALUE ALARM SUM TRK VAL MEMORY SIZE CALC VAL ACK OPTION FF VAL NV CYCLE T SENSOR TEMP ALARM HYS FF SCALE FREE SPACE SENSOR TEMP UNIT HI HI PRI FF GAIN FREE TIME LEVEL COEFF Continued next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 139 8 16 Obj
117. The VendorName ModelName and Revision are defined by the manufacturer The Profile number is a standard value defined by fieldbus specifications VFD Contents The VFD contains all objects and object descriptions which may be used by you The VFD contains a single Object Dictionary July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 141 8 18 System Management SM Description System Management Key Features System Management Information Base SMIB System Management SM operates on special objects in the System Management Information Base SMIB which is part of the Management Virtual Field Device VFD The key features of system management operation e Provide system application clock time synchronization e Provide scheduling of function blocks e Manage automatic device address assignment Provide tag search service The SMIB contains various objects that are associated with system management operation Table 58 shows a listing of the SMIB object dictionary Groups of objects along with their starting index number are included in the SMIB for the ST 3000 FF The numbers in parenthesis n indicate the number of objects Table 59 ST 3000 FF SMIB Object Dictionary Index Numer Set anager Agent Oeae eose _ ec eS __ Continued on next page 142 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 18 System Management SM
118. able resistance and device current requirements limit the number of devices on a network segment 1 The output voltage of the power supply must be considered when building a fieldbus segment Typical fieldbus devices require a minimum of 9 volts to operate See power requirements for the ST 3000 FF in Section 4 2 2 Resistance of the fieldbus cable produces a voltage drop along a segment and must also be considered 3 The device startup current as well as the operating current must be considered because some devices require considerably more current when they are first powered up and begin to operate The ST 3000 FF does not require extra current at start up The power calculation for a network segment should allow for these factors voltage current and resistance otherwise the network may not start up when power is first applied Refer to Wiring Diagram 851309440 in Section 13 for current resistance wiring recommendations for the ST 3000 FF The operating power required by fieldbus devices varies by device type and manufacturer Please check the device specifications for the device power requirements For the bus with spurs and tree wiring schemes there are guidelines for the length of spurs and the number of devices that can be connected on these spurs The guidelines established are only recommendations for the maximum cable length to assure adequate signal quality Spur length depends upon e Cable type characte
119. ailable to set the condensate temperature from about 70 to 200 F 21 to 93 C They must be located within 6 to 12 inches 15 to 30 cm of the transmitter body and like all steam traps they also require periodic maintenance The engineering of this type system is more complex than electric systems since the amount of heat loss upstream of the CTV valve under varying conditions will determine the location of the steam water interface It could occur within the heater coil or further up the steam line thus affecting the heating efficiency within the insulated enclosure Therefore steam control of materials which freeze or become too viscous above 100 F 38 C should probably not be attempted without some experimenting with the specific piping layout used Uncontrolled steam heating even with the best pressure regulation and desuperheating of steam should not be used to maintain transmitter temperatures above 100 F 38 C since this type of fixed Btu input must either over or under heat under normal ambient swings As with electric heating there are many types of commercial steam heating units available such as radiant heaters hollow meter body studs or just tubing lagged to the impulse piping and transmitter body The same precaution applies to the use of hollow studs as on the electrical versions Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 285 C 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continue
120. al failure has occurred in the processor memories or e the error was caused by transient noise In either case it may be possible to restore transmitter operation with the suspect device Ifthis BLOCK ERR condition occurs follow the recommended actions below to properly diagnose and correct the fault Write Resource block MODE BLK TARGET to Out of Service O S Write RESTART parameter to PROCESSOR This will restart the processor and allow the BLOCK ERR to be recalculated Allow the transmitter to run for 10 seconds so that the diagnostic rechecks for any memory failures After 10 seconds if e Errors are reported then replace transmitter electronics e errors are reported then write MODE BLK TARGET to AUTO in resource block July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide xxi Before You Begin Please Note Transmitter Terminal Blocks Depending on your transmitter options the transmitter may be equipped with either a 3 screw or 5 screw terminal block inside the electronics housing This may affect how to connect the fieldbus cable wiring to the transmitter See Section 5 4 for the terminal block connections for each type terminal Section 13 provides additional wiring diagrams showing alternate wiring methods Electronics Terminal a Housing Block N Internal Ground Terminal 3 Screw Terminal Block Electronics Terminal H
121. alog output and Proportional Integral Derivative PID control These blocks can be connected together to build a process loop The action of these blocks can be changed by adjusting the block s configuration and operating parameters Continued on next page ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 1 4 Fieldbus Overview Continued Figure 5 Fieldbus Devices Contain Device Applications and Function Blocks Fieldbus Device Device Application Function Block Function Block Block Parameters Block Parameters Function Block Block Parameters 1 4 7 Fieldbus _ gt 573000 FF The ST 3000 FF Fieldbus Transmitter contains the electronics interface Transmitter compatible for connecting to a fieldbus network ST 3000 FF application Application is configured using a fieldbus configuration software program The configurator software allows the user to configure blocks change operating parameters and create linkages between blocks that make up the ST 3000 application The changes to the ST 3000 application are then written to the device and initialized July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 9 1 5 Transmitter Order Order Components Figure 6 shows the components that would be shipped and received for a typical ST 3000 FF transmitter Figure 6 Typical ST 3000 FF Transmitter Order Components Ordered Series 100 ST 3000 FF Diff
122. ameter TT CAUTION These values are for the sensor only The maximum pressure allowed to any Maximum Values for transmitter with remote seals flange or fittings must be limited to either the SENSOR MAX SP amp pressure rating of the transmitter sensor or the pressure rating of the remote SENSOR MAX OVP seals flange and fittings whichever is lower Level Calculation The ST 3000 FF has the ability to put the measured pressure value through a fifth order polynomial equation This calculation allows the transmitter to closely approximate the level of an irregularly shaped tank or vessel The following page describe the level calculation along with an example of its use Enabling the Level The CHANNEL parameter in the Analog Input block is used to select the Calculation measurement value from the transducer block which is either PRIMARY VALUE or CALC VAL e When CHANNEL 1 PRIMARY VALUE is selected as input to the Al block e When CHANNEL 2 the level calculation is enabled and CALC VAL is the selected input to the Al block which is the direct pressure measurement value from the sensor Therefore if you wish to use the level calculation you set the Al block CHANNEL parameter to equal 2 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 95 8 5 Transducer Block Continued Parameters used in the Level Calculation LEVEL COEFF Parameter 4 TANK RANGE Pa
123. ansmitter housing Replace end cap and tighten end cap lock Connect a flat braided wire to the external ground screw of the transmitter housing Electronics Housing Connect to Earth Ground Using the shortest length possible connect the other end of the braided wire to a suitable earth ground Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 55 5 44 Wiring ST 3000 FF Transmitter Continued Approval Body Requirements Lightning Protection Process Sealing Explosionproof Conduit Seal Information on hazardous location standards and approval options are found in Appendix A Some approvals are pending When your transmitter is equipped with optional lightning protection you must connect a wire from the transmitter to ground as shown in Step 6 of Table 18 to make the protection effective The St 3000 Series 100 100e 600 and 900 Smart Pressure Transmitters are CSA certified as Dual Seal devices in accordance with ANSI ISA 12 27 01 2003 Requirements for Process Sealing between Electrical Systems and Flammable or Combustible Process Fluids Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I Division 1 Group A Hazardous Classified Location in accordance with ANSI NFPA 70 the US National Electrical Code NEC require a LISTED explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit within 18 inches of the transmitt
124. ardous Locations Continued IEC Methods of The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use Protection in given locations Protection Concept Permitted Use Flameproof Zone 1 amp 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame Intrinsic Safety Zone 0 1 amp 2 Limits energy of sparks under 2 faults Intrinsic Safety ELEM Zone 1 amp 2 Limits energy of sparks under 1 fault Encapsulation 2 1 2 1 Zoei amp 2 2 Keeps flammable gases out Keeps flammable gases out gases out Increased Safety NN Zone 1 amp 2 No arcs sparks or hot surface Powder Filled Zone 1 amp 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame Oil Immersion Immersion 2 1 2 1 Zoei1 amp 2 2 Keeps flammable gases out Keeps flammable gases out gases out Non sparking Zone 2 No arcs sparks or hot surfaces under normal conditions Enclosed Break Zone 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame Limited Energy nA Zone 2 Limits energy of sparks and surface temperature under normal conditions Restricted Breathing Keeps flammable gases out Continued on next page 254 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 A 2 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Classification of Hazardous Locations Continued IEC Temperature Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous location must Classification also be classified for the maximum surface temper
125. ass 150 flange Gauge Pressure e Process head with 1 2 inch NPT female connection Series 100 transmitters e In line 1 2 inch NPT female connection STGxxL e In line 7z inch 9 16 01319213 e Process heads with 1 4 inch NPT female connection STG9x4 e Flange adapters and manifolds with 1 2 inch female connections are optional STG9x4 e 2 inch Sanitary Tri Clamp STG1xT e Flush mount in 1 weld sleeve with O ring and locking bolt Absolute Pressure e Process head with 1 2 inch NPT female connection STAX22 x40 e In line 72 inch M NPT 9 16 AMINCO DIN19213 Flange Mounted Small flange 1 2 inch 1 1 and 2 inch STFxxT Liquid Level 2 3 or 4 inch flange with flush or 2 4 or 6 inch extended diaphragm See Table 13 on high pressure side DN 50 80 or 100 PN 40 flange with flush or 2 4 or 6 inch extended diaphragm See Table 13 on High Pressure Side Remote See Model Selection Guide for description of available Diaphragm Seals Flanged Threaded Chemical Tee Saddle and Sanitary process connections Reference side has standard differential pressure process head Continued on next page 44 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 5 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Flange descriptions Table 13 describes the available flange connections for flange mounted liquid level transmitters Tab
126. at device s PV pressure has been below the value of minimum specification limit plus 1096 of range Example 800 inH2O 160 inH2O 640 inH2O PV UNDER RNG DATE Date and time when PV pressure last passed above the value of minimum specification limit plus 1096 of range Example 800 inH2O 160 inH2O 640 inH2O TEMP OVER RNG CTR Accumulation of minutes that device s meter body process temperature has been above the value of maximum specification limit less 1096 of range Example 125 C 16 5 108 5 C TEMP OVER RNG DATE Date and time when meter body process temperature last passed below the value of maximum specification limit less 1096 of range Example 125 C 16 5 108 5 C TEMP UNDER RNG CTR Accumulation of minutes that device s meter body process temperature has been below the value of minimum specification limit plus 1096 of range Example 40 C 16 5 C 23 5 TEMP UNDER RNG DATE Date and time when meter body process temperature last passed above the value of minimum specification limit plus 1096 of range Example 40 C 16 5 C 23 5 TEMP MIN Minimum meter body process temperature value that the device has experienced during it s service life 94 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 ST PR Working pressure also known as pressure on high side of the device for DP Differential Pressure devices Units are always PSI pounds per square
127. at user defined commands are executed performed lower trim point when the command is 2 CAL UPPER written DREA CAL resets to zero p after being written 3 CAL ZERO Calibrate zero 4 CAL RESTORE Set transmitter to final factory calibration 5 CAL CLEAR Clear user calibration adjustments CAL UNIT The engineering units used in User selected units calibration CAL POINT HI The upper calibration trim User selected value point CAL POINT LO The lower calibration trim User selected value point Continued on next page 186 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 10 3 Calibration Continued Table 70 Transducer Block Calibration Parameters continued CAL STATUS The status of the selected 1 Success Calibration command calibration command completed successfully 2 Calibration failed High and low trim points or the measurements taken at those points contain equal values Attempt to calibrate an AP transmitter at a negative trim point 3 Bad factory calibration For CAL RESTORE 4 Bad user calibration For saving factory calibration 5 Internal error 6 Bad units CAL UNITS is invalid 7 Bad sensor Bad pressure reading 8 Bad trim point CAL POINT or CAL POINT LO is outside of the characterized range for the device URL LRL 9 Success with excess Calibration was successful but resulted in an excess zero or excess span co
128. ator Station J Junction Block 1 Terminator lec Power Conditioner May be contained in power supply 24101B Table 4 Off line Configuration Wiring Procedure Connect fieldbus cable to junction block and to fieldbus interface card on the PC O Observe polarity of fieldbus cable throughout the network Loosen end cap lock and remove end cap cover from terminal block end of electronics housing Continued on next page 20 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 32 Off line Configuration Continued Establish Communications Table 3 Off line Configuration Wiring procedure continued Observing polarity connect positive fieldbus lead to Signal terminal and negative fieldbus lead to Signal terminal Example Connecting fieldbus to transmitter Internal Ground Terminal Fieldbus Cable v At the junction block connect a fieldbus terminator in parallel with the transmitter Refer to Figure 10 Connect a power supply power conditioner if needed and a fieldbus terminator to the fieldbus cable Turn on power supply on the fieldbus link Start fieldbus configuration application on PC Once you have established communications between the transmitter and the PC you can then check out the transmitter If the transmitter 1s not visible in the configurator application window see Troubleshooting in Sectio
129. ature that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as referenced to the maximum operating ambient of the equipment The maximum surface temperature must be less than the minimum autoignition temperature of the hazardous atmosphere present The temperature shall be indicated in identification numbers as listed in the following table Maximum Temperature Temperature Degrees C Degrees F Identification Number 450 842 300 572 200 392 ontinued on next page Certification and conformity details If Code is Then transmitter option 1C FM approval body certification for Explosion proof Flameproof Class l Division 1 Groups A B C D Dust Ignition Proof Class Il III Division 1 Groups F G Non Incendive Class Division 2 Groups A B C D ntrinsically Safe Class Il Ill Division 1 Groups A C D E F G 2J CSA approval body certification for Explosion proof Class Division 1 Groups B C D Dust Ignition Proof Class 11 111 Division 1 Groups F G Intrinsically Safe Class Il IIl Division 1 Groups B C D E F G Non Incendive Class l Division 2 Groups A B C D CA IECEx approval body certification for Flame proof Zone 1 Ex d IIC Intrinsically Safe Zone 0 1 Ex ia SAEx approval body certification for Intrinsically Safe Zone 0 1 Ex ia Flameproof Zone 1 Ex d July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 255 7
130. ble 1 outlines the basic component parts needed to install and operate the ST 3000 FF on a fieldbus network Table 2 Components Required for ST 3000 FF Installation ST 3000 FF Transmitter Measures process pressure and transmits Field Device process data to operator station or host computer Power Supply Furnishes DC power to fieldbus devices Power Conditioner Acts as a filter to prevent the power supply from interfering with the fieldbus signaling May be part of a fieldbus power supply Fieldbus Cable Twisted pair shielded wire used to interconnect fieldbus devices Fieldbus Terminators A signal termination device used to prevent reflected signals noise from distorting fieldbus communications Fieldbus IS Barriers Intrinsic safety wire barriers are required for For hazardous area hazardous location installations installations Fieldbus Wiring Blocks Wiring blocks allowing easy connection of devices cable terminators surge suppressors and other fieldbus network components Continued on next page 16 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 2 3 Installation Components Continued Operator Interface In the control room an operator station a personal computer or host computer acts as the operator interface to the fieldbus network Using supervisory control software applications the field devices on a fieldbus network can be monitored and controlled at the operator interface Figur
131. block was placed into the OOS mode Do you wish to complete the Restore Calibration procedure to use factory calibration settings 1 Yes 2 Abort CAL_STATUS is SUCCESS Set the Transducer block to Auto mode to resume normal device operation Write Changes Read All 160 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 21 Transducer Block Methods Continued The Clear Calibration Corrects Reset Method provides an automated procedure to allow the transmitter to operate using characterization constants only This method uses the calibration procedure as outlined in section 10 3 Calibration t ST 4616821 XD 4616821 ST3000TB Apply Values Main Menu ERE 57300076 46 c eh m B 2 To Auto Process Alarms Diagnostics Trends Others Methods Do you wish to begin the Clear Calibration Corrects Reset procedure with the block set to the OOS mode a 1 Yes 2 No The transducer block was placed into the OOS mode Do you wish to complete the Clear Calibration procedure to clear calibration settings 1 Yes 2 Abort STATUS is SUCCESS Set the Transducer block to Auto mode to resume normal device operation Write Changes Read All July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 161 8 21 Transducer Block Methods Continued The Calibrate Zero Input Zero Method provides an automated procedure to calibrate the sensor to correct the i
132. by other materials so that they present an explosion hazard Atmospheres containing combustible dusts not included in Group E or F including flour wood grain and other dusts of similarly hazardous characteristics Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 245 A 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations Continued Methods of Protection The following table summarizes available methods of protection for use in given locations Explosionproof XP Division 1 amp 2 Contains explosion and quenches flame Intrinsic Safety Division 1 amp 2 Pressurized Type X and Y Temperature Equipment intended for installation directly within the hazardous Classification classified location must also be classified for the maximum surface temperature that can be generated under normal or fault conditions as referenced to either 40 C 104 F or the maximum operating ambient of the equipment whichever is greater The maximum surface temperature must be less than the minimum autoignition temperature of the hazardous atmosphere present The temperature shall be indicated in identification numbers as listed in the following table Maximum Temperature Temperature Degrees C Degrees F Identification Number 300 572 280 536 260 500 230 446 246 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 A 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations Cont
133. ce establish communications with the device on the fieldbus network If the device is not visible on the network check to make sure that the correct polarity is observed on the fieldbus cable connection to the transmitter terminal block If the polarity is reversed no damage will result the device simply will not work Also see Troubleshooting Section 11 Verify the device ID of the transmitter by checking a number of device parameters These parameters contain the following information e transmitter type pressure transmitter temperature transmitter flow transmitter e device tag tag description of the transmitter e sensor serial number e firmware revision level revision level of the firmware elements Check the following transmitter parameters listed in Table 21 and note the values to identify the transmitter NOTE We suggest that you verify that the correct version of the Device Description files are present on the host computer Look in the READ ME TXT file on the diskette shipped with the transmitter This enables you to see the correct parameter names and descriptions when viewing the device parameters Table 22 Transmitter Identification Look at this Parameter To Verify Resource Block DEV TYPE That the transmitter is the proper device type For all ST 3000 type pressure transmitters the value is 0002 Continued on next page 62 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference
134. ce Guide 247 A 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations Continued Entity Concept Under entity requirements the concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated apparatus not specifically examined in such combination The criteria for interconnection is that the voltage Vmax and current Imax which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain intrinsically safe considering faults must be equal to or greater than the voltage Voc or Vt and current Isc or It levels which can be delivered by the associated apparatus considering faults and applicable factors In addition the maximum unprotected capacitance Ci and inductance Li of the intrinsically safe apparatus including interconnecting wiring must be less than or equal to the capacitance Ca and inductance La which can be safely connected to the associated apparatus If these criteria are met then the combination may be connected and remain intrinsically safe Both FMRC and CSA define the entity parameters in Tables A 1 and A 2 Table A 1 Factory Mutual FM Entity Parameters Explosionproof for Class Division 1 Groups A B C amp D Dust Ignitionproof for Class Il Division 1 Groups F amp G Suitable for Class Ill Division 1 Conduit seals required within 18 of enclosure Group only Intrinsically Safe for use in Class Division 1 Groups A B C amp D Class Il Division 1 Groups F
135. cer block are supplied as inputs to the AI block Values from Transducer Block Input to AI Block e PRIMARY VALUE CALC VAL Selected FIELD VAL by the CHANNEL parameter value see below SENSOR TEMP AUX VAR1 CHANNEL Parameter CHANNEL parameter in the AI block selects the input from the transducer block which is either PRIMARY VALUE or CALC VAL When Value Selected CHANNEL from Transducer Block is equals PRIMARY VALUE which is the direct pressure measurement value from the sensor CALC VAL which is the result of the level calculation See Level Calculation Formula in the previous subsection 8 5 An Error the Al block remains in out of service O S mode XD SCALE parameter XD SCALE is user defined parameter and depending on the CHANNEL parameter value the XD SCALE parameter must be set to the following values When Set XD SCALE parameter CHANNEL equals XD SCALE UNITS INDEX must contain the same units as PRIMARY VALUE RANGE UNITS INDEX in the transducer block If not the AI block remains in the O S mode XD SCALE range limits 100 and EU 0 must be configured according to your application The XD SCALE UNITS INDEX parameter must be set to engineering units of percent Continued on next page 100 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 86 Analog Input Function Block Continued AUX VAR1 parameter Contains the same temperature meas
136. ces This schedule is coordinated with the function block execution schedules in the device and other fieldbus devices on the network Additional information on the FBAP contained in the ST 3000 FF is found in Section 8 Function Block Application Description An FBAP containing default configuration parameters is resident in the firmware of the transmitter and 15 loaded on power up using the FBUS configurator or other fieldbus configuration application you can create or make changes to a FBAP for the transmitter s process application Configuring the ST 3000 FF results in Function blocks that execute according to a user defined schedule e Measurements that are processed according to various user configurable parameters found within the function blocks Anoutput published on the fieldbus network according to a user defined publishing schedule The output then is available to other fieldbus devices and function blocks Sample printout of a typical device configuration for ST 3000 FF transmitters is given in Appendix B Continued on next page 64 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 6 5 Function Block Application Process Continued Fieldbus Configuration Application Creating a New FBAP The ST 3000 FF transmitter is configured using a fieldbus configuration application running on a operator station PC or host computer The NI FBUS configurator actually pr
137. cesseesteesteceeceeceeeeseeeeeeseneeses 144 9 3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms 145 9 4 Replacing Transmitter Electronics 149 9 5 Replacing Meter Body sss 154 9 6 Code Download Pete d t ed 158 About this Section This section provides information about preventive maintenance routines cleaning barrier diaphragms and replacing damaged parts 166 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 9 2 Preventive Maintenance Maintenance The ST 3000 transmitter itself does not require any specific maintenance Routines and routine at regularly scheduled intervals However you should consider Schedules NES 2 carrying out these typical inspection and maintenance routines schedule that is dictated by the characteristics of the process medium being measured and whether blow down facilities or purge systems are being used Check piping for leaks Clear the piping of sediment or other foreign matter Clean the transmitter s pressure chambers including the barrier diaphragms July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 167 9 3 Background Procedure Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms Depending on the characteristics of the process medium being measured sediment or other foreign particles may collect in the process head cavity chamber and cause faulty measurement In addition the barrier diap
138. ck execution period is 0 125 seconds Algorithm type setting 1 e A B or C has no effect on the validation of these tuning parameters e The PID function block will reject all values outside these ranges Table 45 PID Tuning Parameter Values Value Value Value RATE sec 32 Ts 7500 The value of ZERO is permitted to turn off rate action RESET sec INF 2 T 7500 The value of INF is permitted to turn off reset action Some versions of NI configurator program cannot set INF OUT LAG Ideal PID Fixed for Ideal PID form not configurable Robust NOMEN 7500 Zero permitted which implies no output lag PID BAL TIME EN N A N A Not used in Honeywell Implementation 114 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 7 PID Function Block Continued Mode Restricted Writes to PID Parameters Table 46 Writing to the following PID block parameters are restricted by the block s TARGET and or ACTUAL mode The MODE BLK TARGET or MODE BLK ACTUAL parameter must equal one of the modes in the TARGET or ACTUAL columns below before you can write values to the parameters listed in Table 45 PID Block Mode Restricted Parameters Parameter TARGET mode ACTUAL mode Notes and other Validation restricted restricted 10 of PV SCALE Tracking not operative Note For SP Mode restriction follows target mode All cascades will be broken when SP is written O S or MAN ROUT
139. ck parameters is restricted based on the block s Target and or Actual mode The listing of these parameters are given in the AI block description and PID block descriptions in Section 8 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 73 7 4 Monitoring Local Meter Display Local Meter Display Description Display Self test The Local Meter provides a means of monitoring the transmitter process values at the transmitter The display shows the read only output of the transmitter specifically the value and status of the AI block OUT parameter The value is shown as of range shown on the meter bargraph segments and user selected engineering units shown on the numeric display Status on the display is shown using a number of status indicators and or segments of the digital readout When showing engineering units the values are auto ranged for the most precision available within the limits ofthe display The units are shown as configured in the transmitter and are determined by setting the OUT SCALE parameter in the AI block If the engineering units are not supported by the meter or if the units are unknown the display shows no units indication Stick on labels can be applied to the display to indicate units that are not supported by the meter See Table 27 See Subsection 8 6 for additional details on local meter display values The meter runs a brief self test whenever power is applied to the transm
140. cked to assure condensate removal If the transmitter is located below the process taps not recommended piping must still run downward from the transmitter to the drain point and then up to the process as shown in Figure C 3 Steam or electric heating of the drain point will prevent pipe rupture due to freezing Figure C 3 Piping Installation for Gas Flow Mechanical diaphragm seals Diaphragm seals on the impulse lines provide the most expensive yet broadest application of all the methods Similar in principle to the liquid seals diaphragm seals eliminate the possibility of seal liquid carry over into the process fluid This eliminates the need for periodic maintenance checks to assure full and equal liquid seal legs Welded diaphragm seals with special fills permit temperatures from 34 to 600 F 36 to 315 C at the process interface which can therefore be steam or electrically heated to assure viscosity of tars and similar high freezing point fluids under the coldest conditions Continued on next page 280 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 C 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Mechanical diaphragm seals continued You must be careful to specify large enough diaphragms to accommodate expansion and contraction of the fill fluid under varying temperatures without overextending the diaphragm into its stiff area In general conventional diaphragm seals are satisfactory for pr
141. cription which are used to communicate between blocks Link objects contain information needed to define communication links between function blocks and interface devices and other field devices This information may be read by an interface device that will access information in field devices Example For example link objects may be used to link the output parameter of one function block to the input of another block or a trend object or alert object ST 3000 Link Objects Link objects are used for alarms and events function block linking and trending In the ST 3000 FF there are links objects defined for e The PID block 6 input parameters e The PID and AI blocks 3 output parameters Every alert object Every trend object Table 51 lists the link objects defined in the ST 3000 FF Table 52 Link Objects Defined for ST 3000 FF Link Object for Parameter or Number of Objects Input parameters PID function block BKCAL IN CAS FF VAL IN TRK IN D TRK VAL Output parameters Al function block PID function block BKCAL OUT OUT TOTAL 14 objects 122 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 10 View Objects Description ST 3000 View Objects View objects define a grouping of parameters that can be read over fieldbus using a single message Typically view objects are used by a host device to retrieve certain data efficiently for display without loading down the network Some h
142. ction provides general guidelines that should be considered when wiring the transmitter to a fieldbus network segment A procedure is given in this section for properly wiring the transmitter Refer to Foundation Fieldbus document AG 140 Wiring and Installation 31 25 kbit s Voltage Mode Wire Medium Application Guide for complete information on wiring fieldbus devices and building fieldbus networks The ST 3000 FF is identified as either of the following Fieldbus Device Profile Types in Table 15 as per Fieldbus document 816 Table 16 Foundation Fieldbus Profile Types Device Profile Type Characteristic 111 113 X X Uses standard power signaling to communicate on a fieldbus network X X Is a bus powered device The transmitter does not have an internal power supply and So it receives its dc power from the fieldbus Ix Is acceptable for intrinsically safe 1 5 applications ENEE E Is acceptable for non 1 5 applications There are a number of basic components used in constructing a fieldbus network These items can include e Fieldbus cable Consists of a shielded twisted pair made to fieldbus specifications Although existing two wire cable can be used in some installations fieldbus cable is recommended for new installations e Fieldbus power supply Power conditioner is a fieldbus component that provides impedance matching between the power supply and the fieldbus segment This may be inc
143. ction 2 provides a listing of fieldbus network components and installation tasks Section 3 provides a procedure for performing a bench check or off line configuration to the transmitter Section 4 gives installation and operating considerations before you install the transmitter Section 5 covers mechanical and electrical installation procedures for the transmitter These procedures instruct you on how to properly Mount the transmitter Install piping to the transmitter Make the electrical connections and Apply power to the transmitter Section 6 tells you how to configure the transmitter so it will operate according to your process application This information outlines the configuration procedure which can be done through an operator station or host computer An example showing a sample configuration of the transmitter s parameters is listed in Appendix B Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide Xix Where to Find Information in This Manual continued Operation Maintenance Calibration and Troubleshooting Reference Information Additional Reference Material Section 7 covers operation information Section 9 provides routine maintenance procedures as well as removal and replacement of key transmitter components Calibration procedures are given in Section 10 Troubleshooting routines and diagnostic information is covered in Section 11 Sections 8 1
144. d Steam heating continued See Figure C 8 and C 9 for typical piping installations Table C 1 summarizes the temperature ranges for the various freeze protection systems Table C 1 Temperature Range of Freeze Protection Systems Operating Liquid Seals Diaphragm Steam Steam Heating _ Electric Heat Seas Seals Temperature Ethylene Dibutyl Thermo Glycol Phthalate Valve stated Continued on next page 286 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 C 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Steam heating continued Figure C 8 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating Steam Supply low pressure Pipe insulated with waterproof outer cover shutoff valve 1 4 OD steam tracer line 46 heat Impulse piping with tracer line 1 4 thick insulation Pipe strap about every 15 Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping Steam trap or 1 2 3 valve manifold condensate standard type temperature i ial n Differential pressure transmitter Insulated enclosure 4 Condensate return from steam trap All steam and condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1 per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate All condensate lines must be protected from freezing Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 287 C 1 Po
145. d on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 103 8 6 Analog Input Function Block Continued Block Diagram Figure 28 is a block diagram showing the key components of the AI function block Figure 28 AI Block Diagram Transducer Block SIMULATE AUX VAR1 AUX VAR1 FIELD VAL UNITS 76 low cutoff PV selection 5MODE ACTUAL alarming Function Block ALARM SUM Continued on next page 104 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 6 Analog Input Function Block Continued Table 41 AI Block Parameters The status and value of output from the AI block OUT SCALE Elements used to display the OUT parameter The elements are High and low scale values EU 100 and EU 0 e Engineering units used to display the value UNITS INDEX Decimal places used to display the value DECIMAL PV The status and value of PV This is usually the same as OUT and the same value as PRIMARY VALUE in the transducer block XD SCALE Elements used to display the value obtained from the transducer block The elements are High and low scale values EU 100 and EU 0 e Engineering units to display the value UNITS INDEX Decimal places to display the value DECIMAL NOTE When CHANNEL 1 XD SCALE UNITS INDEX must contain the same units as PRIMARY VALUE RANGE UNI
146. d to scale floating point values for display purposes The manner in which the parameter will participate in inter device communications Use is defined as l Function block Input The input may be connected to a function block output or used as a constant O Function block Output An output may be referenced by other function block inputs C Parameter value Contained in the block available for interface operation diagnostic and or configuration Model is The name of the parameter In this case the attribute indicates that it is a contained parameter and may not be referenced by link objects for use as an input to function blocks Indicates the type of memory where the parameter is stored S Static Writing to the parameter changes the static revision counter ST REV N Non volatile Non volatile Non volatile parameters are stored internally to actual non volatile memory on periodic basis to protect the life of the memory This interval is set by the resource block parameter NV CYCLE T at 15 minutes displayed as 28800000 in 1 32 milliseconds It cannot be changed by the user Parameter must be retained during a power cycle D Dynamic The value is calculated by the block or read from another block Continued on next page 116 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 88 Block Parameter Summary Continued Table 46 Table Description for Block Parameter Summary continued
147. dbus Specifications Various Documents Contact the To order these publications and other information products produced by Fieldbus Foundation the Fieldbus Foundation contact them at Fieldbus Foundation or via the World Wide Web at 9390 Research Boulevard Suite 250 http www fieldbus org Austin TX 78759 USA Symbol Definitions Symbol Definition This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for additional information This symbol appears next to required information in the manual This WARNING symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for additional information This symbol appears next to required information in the manual ATTENTION Electrostatic Discharge ESD hazards Observe precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices Protective Earth PE terminal Provided for connection of the protective earth green or green yellow supply system conductor Earth Ground Functional earth connection NOTE This connection shall be bonded to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements iv ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Contents COPYRIGHT NOTICES AND TRADEMARKS ABOUT THIS PUBLICATION PATENT NOTICE REFERENCES SYMBOL DEFINITIONS ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE TECHNICAL ASSISTA
148. dbus configuration application as the operator interface to device set the Transducer block MODE BLK parameter to O S Out of Service E Write the correct engineering units to parameter CAL UNITS Write the low trim point reference value to parameter CAL POINT LO Write the high trim point reference value to parameter CAL POINT HI Apply the low reference pressure to the sensor T Write to parameter CAL a value of CAL LOWER 1 7 Apply the high reference pressure to the sensor Note The pressure is normally applied to the HIGH side but for compound characterized devices where custom calibrations require negative inputs the pressure is applied to the LOW side Write to parameter CAL a value of CAL UPPER 2 If calibration was successful CAL STATUS Success 1 CAL SOURCE User 2 Proceed to next step If calibration failed CAL STATUS a value other than Success 1 See Table 69 for descriptions of CAL STATUS values CAL SOURCE value unchanged Repeat procedure from step 1 When calibration is completed Set Transducer block to Auto mode to resume normal device operation Using a negative trim point when calibrating an AP transmitter will result in an error CAL STATUS will be set to 2 T To verify that the transmitter is reading the correct input pressure you may have to read the PRIMARY VALUE parameter in the transducer block July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Ref
149. deform the gasket submerse it in hot water for a few minutes then firmly press it into its recessed mounting groove in the adapter Table 15 Installing Flange Adapter Step Action 1 Insert filter screen if supplied into inlet cavity of process head 2 Carefully seat Teflon white gasket into adapter groove 3 Thread adapter onto 1 2 inch process pipe and align mounting holes in adapter with holes in end of process head as required Secure adapter to process head by hand tightening 7 16 20 hex head bolts Example Installing adapter on process head O Filter Screen Teflon Gasket Flange Adapter 7 16 x 20 Bolts dk 1 Apply anti seize compound on the stainless steel bolts prior to threading them into the process head Evenly torque flange adapter bolts to a torque of 27 1 Nm 1 4 Nm 20 ft lbs 1 0 ft Ibs 46 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 5 4 Wiring ST 3000 FF Transmitter Wiring the Transmitter to a Fieldbus Network For Detailed Fieldbus Wiring Information Fieldbus Device Profile Type Fieldbus Network Components The ST 3000 FF transmitter is designed to operate in a two wire fieldbus network Although wiring the transmitter to a fieldbus network is a simple procedure there are a number of rules that should be followed when constructing and wiring a network This se
150. e 98 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 5 Transducer Block Continued Measurement Examples Step4 If desired configure the AI block to convert the percentage value coming from the transducer block to engineering units For example if you want to see the value in gallons rather than percent configure the following parameters as described below XD SCALE EU 0 0 XD SCALE EU 100 100 XD SCALE UNITS INDEX Percent OUT SCALE EU 0 0 OUT SCALE EU 100 Volume of the tank representing 100 OUT SCALE UNITS INDEX Desired output engineering units CHANNEL 2 L TYPE Indirect 2 If total vessel volume 0 5 B C 12000 cu ft 89766 gallons Then configure XD SCALE as described above OUT SCALE EU 0 0 OUT SCALE EU 100 89766 OUT SCALE UNITS INDEX gallons Given Pempty 0 Pa 100 PSI If Input pressure 50 PSI Then V 100 2 50 100 1 50 100 1 75 and ALOUT 67324 5 gallons If Input pressure 25 PSI Then 100 x 2 25 100 1 25 100 43 75 and ALOUT 39272 625 gallons July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 99 8 6 Analog Input Function Block Analog Input Block The Analog Input function block takes the output signal from the Function transducer block and makes it available to other function blocks as its output Input to Al Block Two values from the transdu
151. e 9 shows how these components go together to operate on a fieldbus network Figure 9 Fieldbus Network Components Operator Station or Host Computer T Terminator fec Power Conditioner Fieldbus Cable Fieldbus Devices July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 17 2 4 Installation Operation Tasks Installation Tasks Installation of the ST 3000 FF is not difficult The tasks for installing and operating the transmitter are outlined in Table 2 Table 3 Installation Operation Task Summary Bench Check optional Section 3 Off line configuration e Mounting Section 5 2 e Piping Section 5 3 e Wiring Section 5 4 Configure ST 3000 FF Section 6 5 in this manual and transmitter also the user manual supplied with your fieldbus configuration application Operation Section 7 Also see supervisory control application documentation Periodic Maintenance Section 9 e Cleaning Section 9 3 e Calibration Section 10 Troubleshooting if problems Section 11 arise 18 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Section 3 Off line Configuration Optional 3 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section Topic See Page 3 Introduction eene 17 3 2 Off line Configuration ssssssssseseeeee eene 18 About this Section
152. e FF specifications are updated to non volatile memory on a periodic basis NV CYCLE T parameter in the resource block specifies this update interval To provide predictable restart behavior in the transmitter the following Non Volatile parameters are updated to NVM each time they are written over the fieldbus MODE TARGET for all blocks e SP VALUE for the PID block Since these are user written parameters these additional updates to NVM contribute negligibly to NVM wear out However user s are cautioned to not construct control configurations where the above parameters are written continuously via a computer application for example or at rates greater than the NV CYCLE T interval This consideration will help minimize the possibility of NVM wear out In the case of MODE this should not be a problem When users wish to provide set points to the PID block via a computer application users should use RCAS mode with its corresponding setpoint value RCAS IN RCAS IN is updated only at the NV CYCLE T update rate and this mode supports full shedding functionality and PID initialization necessary for a robust application 72 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 7 Operation Considerations Continued Mode Restricted Writes to Parameters Some block parameters have restrictions on having write access to them These are specified in the FF specifications Writing to certain AI block and PID blo
153. e Transmitter Step Action 1 Loosen end cap lock and remove end cap cover from terminal block end of electronics housing Feed fieldbus cable through one of conduit entrances on either side of electronics housing Plug whichever entrance you do not use 5 The transmitter accepts up to 16 AWG 1 5 mm diameter wire Observing polarity connect positive fieldbus lead to Signal terminal and negative fieldbus lead to Signal terminal 3 Screw terminal Internal block Ground Terminal Fieldbus Cable 5 Screw terminal block Option 77 Internal Ground Terminal Fieldbus Cable NOTE Check to make sure that the correct polarity is observed on the fieldbus cable connection to the transmitter terminal block If the polarity is reversed no damage will result the device simply will not work 54 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 5 4 Wiring ST 3000 FF Transmitter Continued Table 18 Wiring the Transmitter continued Step Action 4 Connect the fieldbus cable shield to the other cable shields in the fieldbus segment See NOTE NOTE Fieldbus Cable Shield Connection Normal practice for grounding a fieldbus cable segment is that the cable shield should be grounded in only one place preferably a ground point at the power supply 1 5 barrier or near the fieldbus interface Be sure that the shield does not contact the tr
154. e which is responsible for keeping a link operational The LAS executes the link schedule circulates tokens distributes time messages and probes for new devices The least common multiple of all the loop times on a given link A term used to describe signal processing in a device that is not defined by FF specifications Continued on next page xvi ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Abbreviations and Definitions Term Abbreviation Definition Network Management NM A part of the software and configuration data in a Foundation Fieldbus device that handles the management of the network Network Management NMA Part of the device software that operates on network management Agent objects Network Management NMIB A collection of objects and parameters comprising configuration Information Base performance and fault related information for the communication system of a device Objects Entities within the FBAP such as blocks alert objects trend objects parameters display lists etc Object Dictionary OD Definitions and descriptions of network visible objects of a device There are various object dictionaries within a device The dictionaries contain objects and their associated parameters which support the application in which they are contained Parameters A value or variable which resides in block objects Proportional Integral PID A standard control algorithm Also refers to a PID function b
155. e with the range of temperatures existing at the site including the heated interface WARNING The user must verify the compatibility of any sealing liquid with their process fluid A reliable sealing liquid is a 50 50 percent by volume solution of ethylene glycol and water This solution has a specific gravity of 1 070 at 60 F 15 C a freezing temperature of 34 F 36 C and a boiling temperature of 225 F 106 C at atmospheric pressure Conventional antifreeze liquids for automobile coolant systems such as Prestone and Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 277 C 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Sealing liquid method continued Zerex are solutions of ethylene glycol with some rust inhibitors and possibly leak sealants added they may be used in place of pure ethylene glycol Another sealing liquid used in many chemical plants is dibutylphalate an oily type liquid with a specific gravity of 1 045 at 70 F 21 C It has a boiling point 645 F 340 C and does not freeze so it can be used down to about 20 F 30 C Figures C 1 and C 2 show typical piping installations for this method The process fluid must be heated above its freezing point This is frequently done by lagging in insulating the connecting nipple shut off valve and T connector with the process piping Where the process piping itself requires heating a steam or electr
156. ect Dictionary OD Continued Table 57 Please read CAUTION about these parameters on page 88 Block Parameter Index Table continued PIDBlek cond __ Resource Block 485 HI HI LIM UPDATE EVT 829 RCAS 15 worm irk ver so 297 LOWEST PV pw Block DV_LO_LIM ALERT_KEY DV_HI_ALM 5 5 5 5 5 94 starusorrs 47 voracE mn 5 ee ae 5 5 326 py FTIME 459 EL TEMP OVER RNG CTR pop qp jn Resource Block cont d PRIMARY VALUE RANGE CAL CMD CAL POINT HI CAL POINT LO CAL STATUS CAL SOURCE CAL UNIT XD DIAG DETAIL SENSOR RANGE SENSOR SN SENS MAX SP SENS MAX OVP TANK RANGE BLOCK TEST PV OVER RNG CTR PV OVER RNG DATE PV UNDER RNG CTR PV UNDER RNG DATE EMP OVER RNG CTR EMP OVER RNG DATE EMP UNDER RNG CTR EMP UNDER RNG DATE EMP MAX TEMP MIN STATIC PRESSURE SP MAX SP OVER RNG CTR SP OVER DATE STRESS MONITOR SERVICE LIFE CALIB DATE LAST 2PT CALIB DATE PREV 2PT CALIB DATE RESTORE CALIB DATE CLEAR Sig 5 5 CALIB DATE ZERO 140 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 17 Management Virtual Field Device VFD VFD Description There is one VFD for both System Management and Network Management This is called the Management VFD VendorName Honeywell ModelName ST 3000 Fieldbus Revision as per revision Profile number 0x4D47 MG
157. eel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts 30754419 004 Flange adapter kit Monel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts 30754419 018 Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapters with 316 st steel bolts 30754419 020 Flange adapter kit Monel flange adapters with 316 st steel bolts K9 Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg flange adapter 4 K11 Gasket flange adapter 2 K10 Flange adapter 2 K12 Filter screen 2 30754419 003 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapters with carbon steel bolts 30754419 019 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapters with 316 st steel bolts K9 Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg optional flange adapter 4 K11 Gasket flange adapter 2 K10 Flange adapter 2 Process Head Kits one head with PTFE head gasket 30753908 001 Process head assembly kit Hastelloy C head 30753908 002 Process head assembly kit Hastelloy C DIN head 30753908 003 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head with side vent drain 30753908 004 Process head assembly kit st steel head with side vent drain 30753908 005 Process head assembly kit Monel head 30753908 009 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head without side vent drain 30753908 010 Process head assembly kit stainless steel head without side vent drain 30753908 011 Process head assembly kit stainless steel DIN head without side vent drain 30753908 012 Process head assembly kit carbon steel head model STD110 only
158. emory 2 Start SCAN 3000 system Blank screen application Select controller to fieldbus A window showing a list of network configured data points for the network Select point detail for ST 3000 Point detail display shows FF transmitter current status and operating values Verify range values and Correct calibrate or troubleshoot operating values if necessary July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 71 7 3 Operation Considerations Operation Considerations LAS Capability Special Non volatile parameters and NVM Wear out There are a number of considerations you should note when configuring an ST 3000 FF to operate in a fieldbus network The ST 3000 FF is capable of operating as the Link Active Scheduler LAS The LAS is a fieldbus device which controls traffic on the network such as controlling token rotation and coordinating data publishing This fieldbus function is active in only one device at any given time on a network Devices which can be designated as the LAS may be an operator station or a field device The ST 3000 FF can be designated as a LAS so that in the event of a failure of the primary LAS control in the field could continue Please note that the ST 3000 FF does not support being configured as the primary LAS and therefore the LAS capability in the transmitter is regarded as a backup LAS All function block parameters designated as Non Volatile N in th
159. ence Guide 83 8 3 Block Description Continued Block Parameter Tables on the following pages list all of the block parameters contained Column Descriptions cach of the block objects Table 32 explains the column headings for the parameter listings Table 33 Block Parameter List Column Description A number which corresponds to the sequence of the parameter in the block parameter segment of the object dictionary See Object Dictionary Section 8 16 The mnemonic character designation for the parameter Data Type Data Type or Structure for the parameter value Structure e Data Types consist of simple variables or arrays and are Unsigned8 Unsigned16 Unsigned32 An unsigned variable of 8 16 or 32 bits Floating point Floating point variable Visible string Visible string variable Octet string Octet string variable Bit string Bit string variable Data Structures consist of a record which may be Value and Status float Value and status of a floating point parameter Scaling Static data used to scale floating point values for display purposes Mode Bit strings for target actual permitted and normal modes Access permissions Access control flags for access to block parameters Alarm float Data that describes floating point alarms Alarm discrete Data that describes discrete alarms Event update Data that describes a static revision alarm Alarm summary Data that summarizes 16 alerts Simulate F
160. ence Guide 91 Transducer Block Figure 27 is a block diagram showing the basic components of the Diagram Transducer block Figure 27 Transducer Block Diagram Transducer Block Al Block Sensor Apply PRIMARY VALUE Pressure calibration status Algorithm Temperature CALC VAL status CHANNEL Level polynomial calculation as PRIMARY_VALUE_ LEVEL COEFF RANGE XD SCALE SENSOR TEMP UNIT SENSOR TEMP status AUX VAR1 status 24109 The UNITS INDEX of PRIMARY VALUE RANGE and XD SCALE parameters must contain the same units when CHANNEL parameter equals 1 See XD SCALE parameter in Subsection 8 6 Continued on next page 92 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 5 Transducer Block Continued Transducer Block Table 36 describes the Honeywell parameters included in the transducer Honeywell defined block Parameters Table 37 Transducer Block Parameter Descriptions Name Description or Parameter Contents PRIMARY VALUE Contains the direct pressure measurement of the sensor and is updated continuously when the block is in Auto mode CALC VAL Contains either a calculated value or 0 0 depending upon the following conditions e If CALC VAL is selected by the CHANNEL parameter of the Al block CHANNEL 2
161. ensor The characterized ST pressure signal is developed in the transducer Signal block as PRIMARY VALUE This signal uses the elements in PRIMARY VALUE RANGE in determining the engineering units the decimal places for display and the high and low scale of the value This signal becomes PV value in the AI block and uses the elements of OUT SCALE in determining the units decimal places and the high and low scale values for PV The signal exits the AI block as OUT value which also uses the elements of OUT SCALE Table 40 Transducer Block Parameters PRIMARY VALUE The status and value of the pressure sensor measurement PRIMARY VALUE RANGE Elements used to display the PRIMARY VALUE parameter The elements are High and low scale values EU 100 and EU 0 e Engineering units used to display the value UNITS INDEX Decimal places used to display the value DECIMAL PRIMARY VALUE The high and low scale values of PRIMARY VALUE RANGE Status EU 100 and EU 0 should be set to the maximum allowable range of the pressure sensor signal So that When a properly calibrated transmitter produces the pressure sensor signal within the range of PRIMARY VALUE RANGE the PRIMARY VALUE status is Good Non Cascade alarm status Not Limited When the signal exceeds the range of PRIMARY VALUE RANGE the PRIMARY VALUE status becomes Uncertain alarm status Engineering Units Range Violation amp High or Low Limited Continue
162. ep If calibration failed CAL STATUS a value other than Success 1 See Table 70 for descriptions of CAL STATUS values Repeat procedure from step 1 When calibration is completed Set Transducer block to Auto mode to resume normal device operation July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 193 10 3 Calibration Continued Local Zero Correction This calibration procedure allows you perform a zero correction using the pushbuttons on the local meter The result is the same as in the previous procedure Zero Correction Use the procedure in Table 76 for local zero correction Calibration Procedure Table 76 Local Zero Correction Procedure Connect a tube between the input connections in the high pressure HP and the low pressure LP heads Using a fieldbus configuration application as the operator interface to device set the Transducer block MODE BLK parameter to O S Out of Service At the local meter press and hold the ZERO button on the meter The calibrated pressure measurement is displayed NOTE Units of the value displayed is inches of water Pushbutton DOWN Pushbutton Press and release the DOWN pushbutton on the meter This will zero correct the transmitter If calibration was successful The pressure measurement shows zero on the meter display CAL POINT LO 0 zero CAL SOURCE User 2 If correction fails the meter display will flash err for a f
163. er e oem mmm OUT LO LIM 0 10 OUT LO LIM SP HI LIM 100 PV SCALE Verify that SP HI LIM SP LO LIM mw vo ume July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 215 11 10 Simulation Mode Simulation Mode A simulation mode is available in the transmitter that is used to aid in Jumper system debug if the process is not running When simulation mode is enabled the SIMULATE parameter in the AI block provides a user selected value as the input to the AI block WARNING Setting Simulation A hardware jumper on the transducer board is set to enable or disable Jumper the SIMULATE parameter See Figure 31 for jumper location Table 90 shows how to set the simulation jumper on the transducer board Figure 31 Simulation Jumper Location on Transducer Board Simulation Jumper Power Connector Meter Flex Tape Connector Connector Read Write Jumper Table 90 Setting the Simulation Jumper To Set the Jumper to Disable the SIMULATE parameter position on the N Y Set transmitter for normal operation Transducer board Enable the SIMULATE parameter Y position on the N Y For testing or debugging purposes Transducer board n 2 Continued on next page 216 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 11 10 Simulation Mode Continued Enabling Simulation SIMULATE parameter is enabled
164. er Crouse Hinds type EYS EYD or EYSX EYDX are examples of LISTED explosionproof seals that meets this requirement Transmitters installed as explosionproof in a Class I Division 1 Group B C or D Hazardous Classified Locations do not require an explosionproof seal to be installed in the conduit NOTE Installation should conform to all national and local electrical code requirements When installed as explosionproof in a Division 1 Hazardous Location keep covers tight while the transmitter is energized Disconnect power to the transmitter in the non hazardous area prior to removing end caps for service When installed as nonincendive equipment in a Division 2 Hazardous Location disconnect power to the transmitter in the non hazardous area or determine that the location is non hazardous prior to disconnecting or connecting the transmitter wires 56 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 5 5 Power Up Transmitter Prepower Checklist Power Up Procedure Before applying power to the fieldbus network you should make the following checks e Verify that the ST 3000 FF transmitter has been properly mounted and connected to a system e The transmitter has been properly wired to a fieldbus network The transmitter housing has been properly connected to a suitable earth ground e The operator station or host computer has been installed and connected to the fieldbus network NOTE
165. er VALUE 0 PID Control Block Continued Index Parameter mnemonic Value Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 275 PID Control Block Continued 61 HI ALM Index Parameter mnemonic Value UNACKNOWLEDGED Uninitialized ALARM STATE Uninitialized TIME STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB CODE Other VALUE 0 62 LO ALM UNACKNOWLEDGED Uninitialized ALARM STATE Uninitialized TIME STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB CODE Other VALUE 0 63 LO_LO_ALM UNACKNOWLEDGED Uninitialized ALARM STATE Uninitialized TIME STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB CODE Other VALUE 0 64 DV HI ALM UNACKNOWLEDGED Uninitialized ALARM STATE Uninitialized TIME STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB CODE Other VALUE 0 65 DV_LO_ALM UNACKNOWLEDGED Uninitialized ALARM_STATE Uninitialized TIME_STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB_CODE Other VALUE 0 66 PID FORM IDEAL PID 67 ALGO TYPE PID 68 OUT LAG 0 69 GAIN 0 70 GAIN COMP 1 71 ERROR ABS 14 5165 72 WSP STATUS Good_Cascade NonSpecific NotLimited VALUE 46 73 BLOCK_TEST BLOCK TEST Oxb3 Constantly increases BLOCK TEST 0x00 BLOCK TEST 0x00 BLOCK TEST 0x00 BLOCK TEST 0x00 BLOCK TEST 0x00 BLOCK TEST 0x22 BLOCK TEST 0x57 276 ST 3000 FF Installa
166. er to N on of BLOCK_ERR messages M the electronics board and set Simulation Active Non critical the ENABLE DISABLE field to 3 4 of the SIMULATE parameter See Subsection 11 10 Input Write Processor or 4 to Failure Process RESTART parameter of Variable has Bad Critical resource block If failure is still Status 7 present replace meter body Memory Failure 9 Set Resource block to O S Lost Static Data Critical Write Processor or 4 to 10 RESTART parameter Lost NV Data 11 Wait 10 seconds Readback Check Critical Failed 12 See Critical Fault NOTE Out of Service 15 Non critical Write proper mode to MODE BLK parameter Unable to write values to valid Configuration See Subsection 11 9 Clearing device parameters Error Block Configuration Errors and Table 86 Summary of Configuration Errors Depending on the fieldbus interface application device operating status and parameter values may appear as text messages The text in the table is typical of values or messages seen when using the NI FBUS configurator Critical Fault NOTE In the case of a critical fault due to Memory Failure Lost NV Static data or Readback check failure you may need to write to the RESTART parameter twice for the transmitter to fully recover from the fault condition Therefore 1 Write 4 or processor to RESTART parameter of resource block 2 Wait until communication is established 3 If
167. erating maintaining calibrating and servicing Honeywell s Smartline family of Series 100 and 900 ST 30007 Transmitters with FOUNDATION Fieldbus FF option This manual provides detailed procedures for transmitter installation to assist first time users This manual applies only to Honeywell s ST 3000 FF Series 100 and 900 Transmitters If you have any of the following ST 3000 transmitter types refer to the appropriate documents listed below ST 3000 Transmitter Type Corresponding Honeywell Documents Series 100 and Series 900 Release 300 Installation Guide 34 ST 33 39 User s Manual 34 ST 25 14 Patent Notice This product is covered by one or more of the following U S Patents 4 520 488 4 567 466 4 494 183 4 502 335 4 592 002 4 553 104 4 541 282 4 806 905 4 797 669 4 735 090 4 768 382 4 787 250 4 888 992 5 811 690 5 875 150 5 765 436 4 734 873 6 041 659 and other patents pending July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide iii References Publications from the We recommend that you obtain these publications which provide Fieldbus Foundation additional information on Fieldbus technology Publication Publication Number Title Technical Overview FOUNDATION Fieldbus FD 043 Wiring and Installation 31 25 kbit s Voltage AG 140 Mode Wire Medium Application Guide Available from the 31 25 kbit s Intrinsically Safe Systems AG 163 Fieldbus Foundation Application Guide Fiel
168. erence Guide 189 10 3 Calibration Continued Restore Factory Use the procedure in Table 73 to calibrate the sensor using the final Calibration Procedure factory calibrated values Table 73 Restoring Factory Sensor Calibration Procedure Using a fieldbus configuration application as the operator interface to device set the Transducer block MODE_BLK parameter to O S Out of Service Write CAL RESTORE 4 to parameter CAL_CMD to restore factory calibration settings See Table 70 Calibration Parameters If calibration was successful CAL STATUS Success 1 CAL SOURCE Factory 3 Proceed to next step If calibration failed CAL STATUS Bad factory calibration 3 See Table 70 for descriptions of CAL STATUS values CAL SOURCE value unchanged When calibration is completed Set Transducer block to Auto mode to resume normal device operation 190 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 10 3 Calibration Continued Clear Calibration to Characterization Values Also called Corrects Reset Example You can erase incorrect calibration data by clearing or resetting the data to default values The default values return the transmitter calibration to the original factory characterization values Characterization calculates a mathematical model of the performance of the transmitter s sensors and then stores that data in the transmitter s memory Note that this is not the
169. erential pressure transmitter with optional mounting bracket Received Shipped ST 3000 FF e Installation and Device Reference Manual Device Description Diskette About Documentation ST 3000 FF Transmitter Installation and Device Reference Manual 34 ST 25 15 provides information for checking installing wiring and configuring the ST 3000 FF transmitter for operation Also a Software Release Guide is included with the transmitter which contains additional operational information for a specific software revision Device Description Also a diskette is shipped with the transmitter containing the device Diskette description and standard dictionary files for the transmitter These files when used in conjunction with the PC based fieldbus configuration application provide an on line description and displays of the transmitter operation See Device Description in Section 8 10 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 1 6 Local Meter Option Option Availability Local Meter Panel Pushbutons The ST 3000 FF can be equipped with a Local Meter option as shown in Figure 7 The local meter provides read only output value of the Analog Input block OUT parameter in both of span and in actual engineering units See Section 7 4 for additional details of the meter See Section 7 5 for the procedure to select engineering units for the local meter display Figure
170. eroes to the second element of the BLOCK_TEST parameter Find and correct any configurable parameter outside its valid range See Clearing Block Configuration Errors in Subsection 11 9 Build and download an execution schedule for the block including links to and from Al block with other function blocks Write Auto mode to MODE_BLK of resource block a Check the parameters ALERT_KEY CHANNEL andL TYPE All values must be non zero b BLOCK ERR for Bit 1 set If set check all configurable parameters for possible invalid values See Clearing Block Configuration Errors in Subsection 11 9 Continued on next page 212 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 11 8 Block Configuration Errors Continued Table 87 Summary of Configuration Errors continued Problem Fault Probable Cause Recommended Action Unable to change Analog 5 SCALE UNITS INDEX is not 5 If CHANNEL value is 1 Input block from O S mode equal to the Transducer block then XD SCALE units Continued output units must equal the units in transducer block parameter PRIMARY _ VALUE_RANGE b If CHANNEL value is 2 then the units must equal 1342 The second element of Write all zeroes to the BLOCK_TEST is non zero second element of the BLOCK_TEST parameter Al Block is in the correct mode Simulation active Disable simulation See but does not seem to be Subsection 11 10 for operatin
171. es 48 Fieldbus Device Type 47 Fill fluid 40 FISCO Concept 250 Flange connections 45 Extended 45 Flush 45 Pseudo Flush 45 Flange mounted transmitter 39 Mounting 39 Flush mounted transmitter 38 FNICO Concept 252 Freeze Protection 276 Function Block Application 80 Function Block Application Process 64 description 81 Function Blocks 9 analog input 100 description 82 PID block 109 resource block 85 scheduling 148 transducer block 90 Grounding 53 H Hazardous locations reference Classifications 253 North American Classifications 244 I Installation 29 mounting 30 overview 13 piping 42 wiring Error Not a valid bookmark in entry on page 47 Installation Components 16 Installation Considerations 23 Intrinsically Safe Applications 53 explosionproof installations 56 L LAS Capabiltiy 72 Level Calculation 95 Lightning Protection 56 Local Meter option changing output display 78 description 74 fault indications 77 typical indications 76 Local Meter Option 11 74 107 specifications 28 M Maintenance Replacing meter body 77 Maintenance 166 Replacing transmitter electronics 72 routine 167 Mounting Flush Mounted Transmitter 36 Transmitter to mounting brackets 57 Mounting Precautions Models STA122 and STA922 34 Object Dictionary OD 137 Operating Temperature Limits for transmitters with silicone fill fluids 25 Operation Tasks 71 Operat
172. escription Alert objects support the reporting of alarms and update events to operator interface devices and other field devices Alert objects are used to communicate notification messages when alarms or events are detected These objects are defined in the function block application Alert objects contain The value of the data Block index a number e Alert key parameter e Time stamp e Priority ST 3000 Alert Objects Three alert objects are defined in the ST 3000 FF for event and alarm reporting 1 for events used for static parameter update events 1 for discrete alarms used for block alarms for analog alarms July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 131 8 12 Alarm and Event Reporting Alarms Events and Alarms are generated when a block leaves or returns from a particular Alert Objects state A function block changes state and generates an alarm that indicates high tank pressure Events are instantaneous occurrences that are significant to block execution or operation of a process For example a change in the state of a variable generates an event message Alarms and event messages are communicated to operator interfaces and other devices using alert objects Alarm Messages e Alarm messages contain a Time stamp Snapshot of the data Specified priority Alarms must be confirmed otherwise the block will continually report the alarm Another alarm is
173. ese derat 116 Alert Objets s ioi teer eere eee seen teils 122 8 12 Alarm and Trend Reporting 123 8 13 Trend Objects ene tiere RH e 124 8 14 Domain ObJects nette i e d ate eee 125 8 15 Device Descriptions DD sse een 126 8 16 Object Dictionary 128 8 17 System Management VFD sss nenne 132 8 18 System Ma agement siinsesse iana enne 133 8 19 Network 22 04012 2 00 0 00 000000000 140 This section provides information about the construction and contents of the ST 3000 FF Function Block Application Process FBAP This is the application that defines transmitter function and operation in the process application This information is provided to give some understanding of the elements that make up the configuration of the device application FBAP elements are described as they apply to the ST 3000 FF transmitter in the following sections More detailed information can be found in Foundation Fieldbus documents FF 890 and FF 891 Foundation Specification Function Block Application Process Parts 1 and 2 80 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 2 Function Block Application Process Function Block Application Process FBAP FBAP Elements Device Objects The Function Block Application Process FBAP or application comprises a set
174. essure ranges above approximately 75 psig with special large diameter elements required for low pressure or differential pressure measurements You can lag insulate impulse lines and diaphragm seals with the process piping but this practice is only common with liquid level applications involving highly viscous materials unsuitable for 1 2 inch impulse lines Use a tank mounted flanged seal in such installations Otherwise it is more desirable to keep the capillary lengths short the transmitter accessible for maintenance and for flow applications the normal 3 valve manifold assembly close to the transmitter for normal service checks Thus the impulse lines valving and diaphragm seals with 1 2 inch connections would be electrically or steam traced with high temperature steam permitted without damage to the transmitter See Figures C 4 and C 5 for typical piping layouts Figure C 4 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter with Metal Diaphragm Seals impulse piping 3 valve manifold and upper flanges of the metal diaphragm seals must be insulated and where required also heated by electric or steam 1 2 3 valve manifold standard type with 9 suitable temperature rating Differential pressure transmitter with metal diaphragm seals DI Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 281 C 1 Possible Solutions Methods
175. ew seconds and then display the calibrated pressure measurement NOTE Calibration will fail if transducer block is not O S Release buttons and remove tube from HP and LP inputs 194 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Section 11 Troubleshooting 11 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section Topic See Page 1121 Introduction os oett sette eU 195 1 2 OVervle Ww 3 one ee ree ne nei 197 11 3 Device Troubleshooting sese 198 11 4 Transmitter 204 11 5 Non Critical Fault Summary seen 207 11 6 Critical Fault Summary seen 208 11 7 Device 5 14 0212202 eene 209 11 8 Block Configuration Errors esee 212 11 9 Clearing Block Configuration Errors 215 11 10 Simulation Mode ettet eret inen 217 About this section this section contains information to guide you in identifying device faults and suggested actions to correct them The approach to troubleshooting is geared toward determining the cause of the fault through definition of the symptoms such as device not visible on network or not able to write values to parameters The information is organized the following way Device Troubleshooting tables list some of the more commonly encountered faults and suggested things to check in order to f
176. eywell Middle East Ltd Phone 971 2 4041246 FAX 971 2 4432536 Sultanate of Oman Honeywell amp Co Oman LLC Phone 968 24 701153 Ext 33 FAX 968 24 787351 Saudia Arabia Honeywell Turki Arabia Ltd Jubail Office Phone 966 3 341 0140 Fax 966 3 341 0216 Honeywell ATCO Dammam Office Phone 0096638304584 Fax 0096638338059 Kuwait Honeywell Kuwait KSC Phone 965 242 1327 to 1330 Fax 965 242 8315 Phone 965 326 2934 1821 Fax 965 326 1714 AFRICA Mediterranean amp African Distributors Honeywell SpA Phone 39 02 250 10 604 FAX 39 02 250 10 659 South Africa Republic of and sub saharan Honeywell Southern Africa Honeywell S A Pty Ltd Phone 27 11 6958000 FAX 27 118051504 NORTH AMERICA Canada Honeywell LTD Phone 1 800 737 3360 FAX 1 800 565 4130 USA Honeywell Process Solutions Phone 1 800 423 9883 Or 1 800 343 0228 Email ask ssc honeywell com SOUTH AMERICA Argentina Honeywell 5 1 Phone 54 11 4383 3637 FAX 54 11 4325 6470 Brazil Honeywell do Brasil amp Cia Phone 55 11 7266 1900 FAX 55 11 7266 1905 Chile Honeywell Chile S A Phone 56 2 233 0688 FAX 56 2 231 6679 Mexico Honeywell S A de C V Phone 52 55 5259 1966 FAX 52 55 5570 2985 Puerto Rico Honeywell Inc Phone 809 792 7075 FAX 809 792 0053 Trinidad Honeywell Inc Phone 868 624 3964 FAX 868 624 3969 Venezuela Honey
177. ference Guide 75 7 4 Monitoring Local Meter Display Continued Local Meter The ZERO and Down arrow pushbuttons located on the front of the Pushbuttons local meter face allow you to perform a zero correction function See Calibration Section 10 for details and procedure The remaining meter pushbuttons are non functional Typical Operation Table 28 summarizes typical Local Smart Meter indications Note that Indications other combinations of status messages are possible Table 29 Summary of Typical Local Smart Meter Indications Meter Indication What It Means No power applied Normal display for transmitter Digital readout is gallons per minute with 1000 multiplier K Example of a critical error indication CHECK STATUS M 76 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 7 4 Monitoring Local Meter Display Continued Fault Indications When a fault is detected in the transmitter these indications can appear on the meter display as described in Table 29 Table 30 Local Meter Fault Indications Flashes A Critical fault has occurred Such as background diagnostics fault See Section 11 Troubleshooting for No value fault identification and corrective actions displayed OR Local zero correction failed See Calibration Section 10 for details on procedure Alternates with Al block output status is Uncertain uncalibrated transmitter OUT parameter value See Sec
178. fourth tuning constant used in the robust PID it adds roll off to the output response The action is similar to PID with rate gain The Ideal equation is a parallel or non interacting implementation of PID control using three tuning constants It automatically fixes OUT LAG to 16 times the RATE time constant This produces response characteristics equivalent to the algorithms used in TPS products The Robust equation is the same parallel implementation of ideal PID control but allows the engineer to set the OUT LAG and effectively change the rate gain ALGO TYPE is a configuration parameter that contains one of three selected algorithm types A B or C Where RATE GAIN and RESET all act on the error between set point and measured variable B RATE acts on the measured variable only GAIN and RESET use the error C RATE and GAIN act on the measured variable only and RESET uses the error July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 113 8 7 Function Block Continued PID Tuning Table 44 lists the valid ranges for the tuning parameters for the PID Parameters block Note that OUT LAG parameter is not configurable when Ideal PID is selected PID FORM 1 and can be configured when Robust PID is selected PID FORM 2 The values given for these tuning parameters are valid under the following conditions e The values assume that the minimum configurable PID function blo
179. frequency energy and may cause interference to radio and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30 m to the antenna e In special cases when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity the user may have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic emissions of this equipment 2 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 1 3 ST 3000 FF Transmitters About the Transmitter ST 3000 Transmitter with FF option is furnished with FOUNDATION Fieldbus interface to operate in a compatible distributed fieldbus system The transmitter will interoperate with any FOUNDATION registered device See Section 1 4 for an overview of fieldbus The transmitter includes FOUNDATION Fieldbus electronics for operating in a 31 25 kbit s fieldbus network It features standard fieldbus function blocks with manufacturer specific additions for enhanced operation This transmitter can function as a Link Active Scheduler in a fieldbus network The ST 3000 FF comes in a variety of models for measurement applications involving one of these basic types of pressure e Differential Pressure e Gauge Pressure e Absolute Pressure The transmitter measures the process pressure and transmits a digital output signal proportional to the measured variable over a two wire pair Its major components are an electronics housing and a meter body as shown in Figure 1 for a
180. g Key Number STR Table Il Flush Flange 3 5 diaphragm Rt ee Off Line Flange 2 4 diaphragm HEN DEREN Off Line Flange 2 9 diaphragm Se GS Off Line Flange 4 1 diaphragm Ae ee G Extended Flange 2 9 diaphragm E Extended Flange 3 5 diaphragm F Pancake Seal EECA pape anaes Chemical Tee Taylor Wedge OE SERERE ERES Threaded Connection 2 4 Co T SRI ES diaphragm Threaded Connection 2 9 ExJKo diaphragm Threaded Connection 4 1 rg iile diaphragm Sanitary Seal 1 9 diaphragm Sanitary Seal 2 4 diaphragm Coen Sanitary Seal 2 9 diaphragm Pees oe eee Sanitary Seal 4 1 diaphragm Q Saddle Seal 51305141 000 Drawing Number 51305138 000 51305139 000 51305140 000 51305137 000 51305137 000 51305144 000 51305144 000 51305148 000 51305148 000 51305148 000 51305143 000 51305143 000 51305143 000 51305143 000 51305142 000 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 243 Appendix A Hazardous Area Classifications Reference Information is provided to clarify the hazardous location installation Information requirements in North America and internationally An explanation of the applicable enclosure classification systems is also provided A 1 North American Classif
181. g Head H1 Minimum Level HP Side Model STR93D Model STR12D LP Side Model STR13D July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 41 5 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter The actual piping arrangement will vary depending upon the process measurement requirements and the transmitter model Except for flanged and remote diaphragm seal connections process connections are made to 1 4 inch or inch female connections in the process head of the transmitter s meter body For example a differential pressure transmitter comes with double ended process heads with 1 4 inch NPT connections but they can be modified to accept 2 inch NPT through optional flange adapters Some gauge pressure transmitters have a inch NPT connection which mounts directly to a process pipe The most common type of pipe used is gt inch schedule 80 steel pipe Many piping arrangements use a three valve manifold to connect the process piping to the transmitter A manifold makes it easy to install and remove a transmitter without interrupting the process It also accommodates the installation of blow down valves to clear debris from pressure lines to the transmitter Figure 18 shows a diagram of a typical piping arrangement using a three valve manifold and blow down lines for a differential pressure transmitter being used to measure flow Figure 18 Typical 3 Valve Manifold and Blow Down Piping Arra
182. g parameters including names of menus and submenus Therelationship of one parameter to others Information about help text and help procedures e Maintenance calibration and other necessary operation information Standard DD descriptions for function blocks and transducer blocks are maintained by the Foundation Fieldbus These descriptions can be used as part of a field device DD by manufacturers to describe the standard features of their devices Device specific descriptions are developed by manufacturers to describe custom features which are unique to that particular device These two types of DDs the standard and device specific can then be combined to provide a complete DD for the field device A Device Description provides a clear and structured text description of a field device The descriptions found in a DD supplement the object dictionary definitions of device applications So an OD description used in conjunction with the DD will provide a complete detailed description of the device operation Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 135 8 15 Device Description DD Continued Access to Field DDs can be loaded into the device that it describes or stored on an Device DD external medium such as a floppy disk or CD You then can access this information through an operator station and read the DD directly from the device or from the floppy disk You can
183. g procedure The block has not been configured Build and download to execute It is neither in the execution schedule for the function block schedule in the block including links to and System Management Information from block with other Base nor is it linked to another function blocks executing block via the next block to execute field in the block record relative parameter index O The second element of Write all zeroes to the BLOCK TEST is non zero second element of the BLOCK TEST parameter July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 213 11 9 Clearing Block Configuration Errors Clearing Block Tables 88 and 89 list the parameters in the AI and PID blocks that can Configuration Errors cause the status bit of Block Configuration Error to be set in their respective BLOCK ERR parameters The tables also provide the initial values and the valid range for the parameters NOTE Block configuration errors can only be cleared if the function block is being executed running One way of determining block execution is by doing a series of two or three reads of the BLOCK TEST parameter and confirming that the first byte of the parameter is incrementing This will work if the execute rate is fast relative to the speed of reading BLOCK TEST very slowly executing block may not appear to execute because block parameters are updated only when the block executes Table 88 AI Block Parame
184. he transmitter Clear calibration Formerly called Corrects Reset Resets calibration and allows transmitter to operate using characterization constants only Calibrate zero Formerly called Input Zero Calibrates the sensor to correct the input measurement due to fill fluid and transmitter position effects once the transmitter is installed and operating under process conditions Local zero correction Calibrates zero point of the sensor using the pushbuttons on the local meter Performs the same function as calibrate zero procedure July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 185 10 3 Calibration Continued Calibration Parameters used for transmitter calibration are located in the transducer Parameters block These parameters define the type of calibration to be performed and provide the status of the transmitter s calibration whether a calibration was successful or if a failure was detected Table 70 lists transducer block parameters and their values used in the calibration procedures described on the following pages Table 70 Transducer Block Calibration Parameters MODE BLK The operating mode of the Permitted modes The transducer block must transducer block Auto Auto target mode be in the O S mode to perform transmitter O S Out of Service calibration CAL_CMD One byte value which selects 1 CAL LOWER Calibration and correction the calibration operation to be Calibrate
185. he approvals listing The same principle exists for energy limited approvals for EN 50021 which carry the approvals code EEx n L This is just like Intrinsic Safety but note that some North American NI approvals do not allow live working on the wiring at all in which case no nonincendive parameters are published FNICO is like FISCO in that it eliminates the need to calculate cable parameters provided the cable complies with a minimum requirement which is the same as that for FISCO As far as matching power supplies to field instruments is concerned FNICO requires only that the voltage values are compatible and in this case the Vmax for the field device can be taken either from its NI approvals or if no NI approval is stated from the Intrinsic Safety approvals The overall result is that FNICO systems are as easy to design as FISCO but with the benefit of more field devices per trunk due to the relaxed factor of safety for Division 2 apparatus 252 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 2 International Electrotechnical Commission IEC Classification of Hazardous Locations About IEC The IEC has established a number of recommendations applying to the construction of explosion protected electrical apparatus identified These recommendations are found within IEC 79 0 through 79 15 and 79 28 For all EC countries as well as various neighboring countries CENELEC member states the European Standards EN 5
186. he function blocks to one another Interconnect trend and alert objects Review schedule for both function blocks and publishing Break up strategy into sub schedules if desired Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 65 6 5 Function Block Application Process Continued Creating a FBAP continued Table 22 Creating an FBAP file continued se 7 Assign processing order to function blocks if default assignments are not desired 8 Download application to the field devices 10 Upload the network configuration Save application file Tune loops Review errors and correct 66 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 6 6 Setting Write Protect Feature Write Protect Feature ST 3000 transmitters are available with a Write Protect feature The feature consists of a hardware jumper located on the transmitter s electronics board and a software switch that can be set to enable or disable the read and write access to the transmitter configuration The feature is available when the WP option is ordered with the transmitter Without ordering the WP option access to the transmitter s configuration is set to read and write When write protect option is ordered the jumper 15 factory set for read only access write protected position See Figure 24 for the location of the write protect ju
187. hese are shown below 51 4616821 1 4616821 Apply Values al 4616821 Process c 73 28 Scaling Tuning Options Alarms Diagnosti Diagnostics Dthers Methods Process Others Options Alarms Block Information Parameter DESC E MODE TARGET Auto ACTUAL PERMITTED Auto Man 00S NORMAL Auto SUBSTATUS Write Changes Read All July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 163 8 22 Analog Input Block Methods Continued The Block Information Method shows the maximum and minimum PV values detected over the life of the product This date is gathered in Auto Mode operation only 1 4616821 Al 4616821 Apply Values Main AI Menu prea i J Bos ranis i 2 sec 005 Auto Manual Process Sealing Tuning Options Alarms Diagnostics Trends Dthers Methods The following Block Data was collected 3 The maximum Primary Value recorded was 880 0 The minimum Primary Value recorded Write Changes Read All 164 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 165 Section 9 Maintenance 9 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section Topic See Page 91 Introduction ettet 143 9 2 Preventive Maintenance cccecccecs
188. high initial cost of the thermostat systems Never attempt to maintain freeze points above 100 F 38 C without thermostat controls since the Btu required to prevent freezing will normally exceed the body temperature rating under opposite extremes Continued on next page 282 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 C 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Electric heating continued Although systems are available with hollow bolts replacing the normal transmitter body bolts and containing electrical heating elements and thermostats certain precautions are required with such arrangements Some transmitter meter body bolts are too small to accept the available thermostats Also thermostat settings should not approach the body temperature limit because the heat gradient across the meter body can be such that limits are exceeded adjacent to the heating elements even when the thermostat setting is lower Electrical heating systems are available in explosionproof ratings for Class I Group D Division I and II installations The possibility of electric supply failure must be considered For this reason we recommend using alarm devices with manual acknowledgment and reset See Figures C 6 and C 7 for typical piping installations Figure C 6 Piping Installation for Differential Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating and Control amp Electric heating cable Temperat
189. hragm or diaphragms in the transmitter s meter body may become coated with a residue from the process medium The latter is also true for external diaphragms on flange mount and remote seal type transmitters In most cases you can readily remove the process head or heads from the transmitter s meter body to clean the process head cavity and inspect the barrier diaphragm or diaphragms For flange mount and remote seal diaphragms you may only need to run a purge line in the tank to rinse off the face of the diaphragm The procedure in Table 65 outlines the general steps for inspecting and cleaning barrier diaphragms Y ou may have to modify the steps to meet your particular process or transmitter model requirements Figure 30 shows an exploded view of a DP transmitter s meter body for reference Table 65 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms Step Action 1 Close all valves and isolate transmitter from process Open vent in process head to drain fluid from transmitter s meter body if required 1 We recommend that you remove the transmitter from service and move it to a clean area before taking it apart 2 Remove nuts from bolts that hold process head or heads to meter body Remove process heads and bolts See Figure 30 3 Remove O ring and clean interior of process head using soft bristle brush and suitable solvent 4 Inspect barrier diaphragm for any signs of deterioration or corrosion Look for possible resid
190. ic trace is run around their components with consideration given to the boiling point of the sealing liquid Figure C 1 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid With Specific Gravity Heavier Than Process Fluid 1 2 seamless pipe nipple 6 long 1 2 pipe cross with 2 pipe plugs 1 2 seamless pipe nipple 6 long 1 2 shut off valve thru port type desirable C pipe cross LA with 2 pipe plugs 1 2 seamless pipe slope at least 1 1 2 shut off valve 1 2 per foot downward port type desirable short as possible to 1 reduce head effect 1 2 pipe union or coupling 4 1 2 3 valve 44 Process pressure manifold transmitter standard type Differential pressure transmitter Continued on next page 278 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 C 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Sealing liquid method continued Figure C 2 Piping Installation for Sealing Liquid with Specific Gravity Lighter Than Process Fluid 1 2 shut off valve thru port type desirable p 1 2 pipe cross 7 with 2 pipe plugs 7 1 2 seamless pipe nipple 6 _ a 12 pipe cross lon 4 1 2 seamless pipe 9 M un 2 pipe plugs slope at least 1 1 2 seamless per foot downward pipe nipple 6 long 4 1 2 seamless pipe short as possible to reduce head effect 1 2 shut off T pipe union valve thru port or coupling type desirable
191. ical Zero correction factor is outside acceptable limits Uncertain 1 Excess span calibration Non critical Span correction factor is outside Inaccurate acceptable limits Meter body fault Non critical Pressure input is two times greater than Upper Range Limit of transmitter OR Critical Electronics module and meter body are incompatible 4 Characterization PROM Critical Characterization PROM not fault functioning properly 5 Suspect input Non critical Input data seems wrong Could be a process problem Possible meter body or electronics based problem Sensor over temperature Non critical Meter body temperature is too high Uncertain Accuracy and life span may decrease Inaccurate if it remains high Meter body overload Pressure input is two times greater Uncertain Non critical than URL of transmitter or a Inaccurate Meter body overload possible sensor fault July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 203 11 4 Transmitter Faults Continued Identifying Device Checking the status and values of key block parameters you can identify Faults the type of device fault critical or non critical Table 81 helps you identify the type of device fault and provides corrective action to restore normal operation Table 81 Identifying Critical and Non critical Device Faults Block Parameter Value or Fault Type Message Look AI BLOCK ERR for message See Subsection 11 7 for detail
192. ication such as NI FBUS Configurator can be used to make all other adjustments in the transmitter 6 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 1 4 Fieldbus Overview What is Fieldbus Fieldbus is an all digital serial two way communication system which interconnects industrial field equipment such as sensors actuators and controllers Fieldbus is a Local Area Network LAN for field instruments with built in capability to distribute the control application across the network See Figure 4 Figure 4 Fieldbus Connecting Control Room and Field Devices Control Room Device Operator Interface Fieldbus LAN ST 3000 ST 3000 Fieldbus Fieldbus FF FF Device Device Open System Design Foundation Fieldbus has defined standards to which field devices and operator control stations communicate with one another The communications protocol is built as an open system to allow all field devices and control equipment which are built to fieldbus standards to be integrated into a control system regardless of the device manufacturer This interoperability of devices using fieldbus technology is to become the industry standard for automation and distributed control systems Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 7 1 4 Fieldbus Overview Continued Hardware Architecture Software Architecture Application Functio
193. ication Process 64 6 6 Setting Write Protect Feature 67 SECTION 7 OPERATION 70 74 Introduction 70 7 2 Operation Tasks 71 7 3 Operation Considerations 72 7 4 Monitoring Local Meter Display 74 7 4 Monitoring Local Meter Display Continued 75 7 5 Changing Local Meter Display 78 SECTION 8 FUNCTION BLOCK APPLICATION DESCRIPTION 80 8 1 Introduction 80 8 2 Function Block Application Process FBAP 81 8 3 Block Description 82 8 4 Resource Block 85 8 5 Transducer Block 90 8 6 Analog Input Function Block 100 8 7 PID Function Block 109 8 8 Block Parameter Summary 116 8 9 Link Objects 122 8 10 View Objects 123 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide vii Contents 8 11 Alert Objects 131 8 12 Alarm and Event Reporting 132 8 13 Trend Objects 133 8 14 Domain Objects 134 8 15 Device Description DD 135 8 16 Object Dictionary OD 137 8 17 Management Virtual Field Device VFD 141 8 18 System Management SM 142 8 19 Network Management 149 8 20 Resource Block Methods 151 821 Transducer Block Methods 157 8 22 Analog Input Block Methods 163 SECTION 9 MAINTENANCE 166 9 1 Introduction 166 9 2 Preventive Maintenance 167 9 3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms 168 9 4 Replacing Transmitter Electronics 172 9 5 Replacing Meter Body 177 9 6 Code Download 181 SECTION 10 CALIBRATION 183 10 1 Introduction 183 10 2 Overview 184 10 3 Calibration 185 viii ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011
194. ication contains the following block objects Resource block Transducer block Two Function blocks Analog Input AT function block Proportional Integral Derivative PID Controller function block Table 31 briefly describes the operation of these blocks Table 32 Function Block Application Process Elements Resource Contains data which describes the hardware physical characteristics of the device Such MANUFAC ID DEV TYPE Device firmware revision Information The resource block does not perform any action but contains parameters which support application downloads Transducer De couples the function blocks from I O devices such as sensors actuators and switches The transducer block interfaces with the sensor hardware and provides either a direct pressure measurement or a calculated value to the Al function block This block also contains sensor specific parameters for calibration and diagnostics Function Blocks In general function blocks perform basic automation functions that are integral to automated control and processing operations The ST 3000 contains two function blocks one Analog Input and one PID block Analog Input Al The analog input function block performs engineering units scaling square root alarming and publishing of the PV on the bus PID Controller Performs standard or robust proportional integral derivative algorithm used in closed loop processing Continued on next
195. ication of Hazardous Locations Electrical Codes Installation of electrical apparatus within hazardous classified locations of the United States is conducted under the provisions of the National Electrical Code NEC ANSI NFPA 70 Article 500 and within Canada under the provisions of the Canadian Electrical Code CEC C22 1 Part 1 Section 18 Classes Hazardous classified locations in both the United States and Canada are categorized into one of these three classes Description of Hazardous Location I Presence of flammable gases or vapors may be present in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures Presence of combustible dusts powders or grains Presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings Divisions The classes listed above are further categorized based upon the level of risk present cen Description of Risk Locations in which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors or combustible dust in suspension are continuously intermittently or periodically present under normal operating conditions Locations in which flammable gases or vapors are present but normally confined within closed containers or systems from which they can escape only under abnormal or fault conditions Combustible dusts are not normally in suspension nor likely to be thrown into suspension Continued on next page 244 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 A 1 North
196. ices or field devices and Objects ae operator interface In order for this communication to take place a communications relationship must be set up using the network management objects and parameters The parameters for this communication relationship are stored in a Virtual Communications Reference VCR object 150 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 20 Resource Block Methods The Main RS Menu tab was added to the Resource Block to provide additional access both parameters and methods The parameters provide access data similar to that contained in the block parameters while the methods provide access to data provided by multi block parameters or a means to automate a procedure such as calibration or manage data reset certain diagnostic data The Main RS Menu contains both Parameter and Method items These are shown below ST 4616821 RS 4616821 RB2 SEE Apply Values MAEM sen RS 4616921 fF Process xp 7 23 Options Periodic U Alarms 005 Aut Diagnostics Advanced Diagnostics Process Tu Others Others Methods Device SW Revision Parameter TAG DE RS Block Information 7 Model Selection Information El MODEL TARGET Auto ACTUAL PERMITTED Auto 00S NORMAL Auto RS STATE lt Write Changes Read All The Parameter items are contained in the first 6 selections from Process through Others selections These provide access to the data previously
197. icients for this equation as the transmitter has no knowledge of the shape of the tank The result of the calculation V is placed in CALC VAL and passed to the AI block The engineering units are always expressed in percent 94 Continued on next page 96 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 5 Transducer Block Continued Example for Using Level Calculation Step 1 Step 2 The following paragraphs describe using an example how to determine the values used to configure LEVEL COEFF and TANK RANGE Following the example are some measurement examples Given the vessel shown below determine the measurements of the vessel and calculate the theoretical polynomial coefficients To do this use a height of 1 for the vertical distance rather than the actual distance representing the pressure range to be configured in TANK RANGE Remember that the polynomial calculates volume not simply vessel shape as a function of level The actual vessel measurements are A 20 ft B 30 ft C 40 ft The theoretical coefficients using a height of 1 are derived to be 0 Ci B 1200 C5 0 5 B C 600 C5 C4 C5 0 Divide all theoretical coefficients by the maximum volume of the vessel again using the height of 1 in the calculations These become the actual coefficients Maximum volume 0 5 1 B 600 So the actual coefficients are C
198. id value 17 LOW CUT 0 18 PV FTIME 0Sec 19 FIELD VAL STATUS Good NonCascade UnacknowledgedBlockAlarm NotLimited VALUE 61 411796 20 UPDATE EVT UNACKNOWLEDGED Unacknowledged UPDATE STATE Not Reported TIME STAMP 08 05 98 15 39 45 MM DD YY HH MM SS STATIC_REVISION 0x0003 RELATIVE_INDEX 0x0010 21 BLOCK_ALM UNACKNOWLEDGED Unacknowledged ALARM_STATE Clear Not Reported TIME STAMP 08 05 98 15 39 45 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB CODE OutOfService VALUE 0x00 22 ALARM SUM CURRENT 0x0000 UNACKNOWLEDGED Block Alm Unack UNREPORTED Block Alm Unrep DISABLED 0x0000 23 OPTION 0x0000 24 ALARM HYS 0 5 25 PRI 0x00 26 HI LIM 1 INF 27 PRI 0x00 28 LIM 1 4INF 13 14 D o 29 LO PRI 0x00 30 LO 1 INF 31 LO LO PRI 0x00 32 LO LO 1 4INF 33 ALM UNACKNOWLEDGED Uninitialized ALARM STATE Uninitialized TIME STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB CODE Other VALUE 0 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 271 Analog Input Block Continued 34 ALM Index Parameter mnemonic Value UNACKNOWLEDGED Uninitialized ALARM STATE Uninitialized TIME STAMP 01 01 72 00 00 00 MM DD YY HH MM SS SUB CODE Other VALUE 0 35 LO_ALM UNACKNOWLEDGED Uninitialized ALARM_STATE Uninitialized
199. iew2 View3 View4 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 4 2 4 4 4 4 p p p pum ume p p p p p T REN NE Note A View object can have a maximum of 123 octets 4 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 61 62 63 64 4 65 67 37 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 125 8 10 View Objects Continued Table 54 View List for Transducer Block Parameters Viewz Views 2 e 2 maps e e a 3 smwey 5 4 uerxv 1 Cit s worse s Roxeg 2 wowegv AA SUM e BOCKAARM Honeywell Parameters PRIMARY VALUE CALC VAL 24 n 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Continued on next page 126 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 10 View Objects Continued Table 53 View List for Resource Block Parameters continued Diagnostic Parameters e fsx a s over Ropar 5 smeswowoR 4 sevene om 5 om Rev
200. igneds C Contained D 4 Table 51 PID Function Block Parameter Summary Parameter Obj Data Type Use Model Valid Initial Mnemonic Type Structure Range Value PID FORM S Unsigned8 C Contained S 2 1 Ideal gt 2 Robust ALGO_TYPE Unsigned8 C Contained 1 A 2 B 3 C OUT LAG S Float C Contained S 4 2 T 7500 GAIN NLIN C Contained 004 250 gt ERROR ABS C Contaimed D 4 PV Scale gt WSP Value and C Contained 5 PV Scale gt Status float BLOCK TEST A B Unsigneds CiContained D 4 gt PID function block execution time Continued on next page 120 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 88 Block Parameter Summary Continued Parameter Summary Continued Table 48 Resource Block Parameter Summary continued Parameter Mnemonic DL CMD1 O S written sequentially DL CMD2 O S written sequentially BLOCK TEST ERROR DETAIL AUX FEATURES Parameter Mnemonic OUT LAG sec TUNE MAN GAIN NLIN TUNE MAN BLOCK_TEST July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 121 8 9 Link Objects Background The function blocks configured to control a process are linked or connected by objects within the devices These links allow you to transfer process and event data from one block to another These links are defined through link objects Link Object Link objects define Virtual Communication Relationships VCRs Des
201. inch SP value for AP Absolute Pressure or GP Gage Pressure type devices is always 0 Units are always PSI pounds per square inch ST PR OVER RNG Accumulation of minutes that device s static pressure has been above the upper specification limit less 1096 of static pressure range Example 4500 psi 450 psi 4050 psi ST PR OVER DATE Time that has passed since device s static pressure has passed below the upper specification limit less 1096 of static pressure range Example 4500 psi 450 psi 4050 psi STRESS MONITOR Percent of service life spent in stressful conditions Indicates the 96 of service life where one or more of PV static pressure meter body temperature or electronics temperature are within 1096 of respective range limits SERVICE LIFE Value is based on electronics temperature Service life accumulates faster at higher temperatures with an exponential relationship At 25 degrees C service life is expected to be around 27 years CALIB DATE LAST 2PT Date and time when the Two point Calibration method was last run CALIB DATE PREV 2PT Date and time when the Two point Calibration method was run prior to last time CALIB DATE RESTORE Date and time when the Restore Calibration method was last run CALIB DATE CLEAR Date and time when the Clear Calibration method was last run CALIB DATE ZERO Date and time when the Calibration Zero T See Section 11 Troubleshooting for details on this par
202. inch 50 millimeter vertical or horizontal pipe using our optional angle or flat mounting bracket or a bracket of your own Flush mount models are mounted directly to the process pipe or tank by a 1 inch weld nipple Those models with integral flanges are supported by the flange connection Figure 12 shows typical bracket and flange mounted transmitter installations for comparison Figure 12 Typical Bracket Mounted Installations Angle Mounting Flat Bracket Mounting Bracket Flange Transmitter Connection Flange Continued on next page 30 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 5 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Dimensions Detailed dimension drawings for given transmitter series and types are listed in Section 13 for reference Note that abbreviated overall dimensions are also shown in the Specification Sheets for the given transmitter models This section assumes that the mounting dimensions have already been taken into account and the mounting area can accommodate the transmitter Bracket mounting Table 8 summarizes typical steps for mounting a transmitter to a bracket Table 9 Mounting ST 3000 FF Transmitter to a Bracket Step Action 1 If you are using an Then optional mounting bracket go to Step 2 existing mounting bracket go to Step 3 2 Position bracket on 2 inch 50 8 mm or and install U bolt around pipe and through ho
203. ind out where the problem is and correct it e Transmitter status tables define some of the conditions that cause critical or non critical faults in the transmitter Critical and non critical faults are described and suggestions are given on where to find further information Device Diagnostics briefly explains about some of the background diagnostics that are active in the device during normal operation Device parameters are described which provide information about hardware and software status within the device Block Configuration Errors summarize conditions within the device that may be caused by configuration errors and suggestions on where to look to correct the errors Simulation Mode tells you how to set up the transmitter to generate a user defined simulated input This feature is useful in debugging the system when the process 18 not running July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 195 11 2 Overview Device Status and ST 3000 transmitter is constantly running internal background Faults diagnostics to monitor the functions and status of device operation When errors and faults are detected they are reported in the status bits of certain block parameters for example BLOCK ERR or ERROR DETAIL Other parameters can be viewed which show a status description and or a value which may help to identify a fault Device status and operational faults are identified by viewing key parameter value
204. integral Smart Meter option SM Li 150 uH With Analog Meter option ME Install in accordance with Honeywell drawing 51204302 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 249 1 North American Classification of Hazardous Locations Continued FISCO Concept The FISCO concept allows the interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to Associated Apparatus not specifically examined in such combination The criterion for such interconnection is that the voltage Vmax or U1 the current Imax or li and the power Pi which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain intrinsically safe considering faults must be equal to or greater than the voltage Uo Voc Vt the current Isc It and the power Po which be provided by the associated apparatus supply unit In addition the maximum unprotected residual capacitance C1 and inductance Li of each apparatus other than the terminators connected to the Fieldbus must be less than or equal to 5nF and 10uH respectively In each LS Fieldbus segment only one active source normally the Associated Apparatus is allowed to provide the necessary power for the Fieldbus system The allowed voltage Uo Voc Vt of the associated apparatus used to supply the bus must be limited to the range of 14Vd c to 17 5Vd c All other equipment connected to the bus cable has to be passive meaning that the apparatus is not allowed to provide energy
205. inued Intrinsically Safe Apparatus Parameters Associated Apparatus Parameters The Apparatus Parameters are defined as follows Vmax Maximum safe voltage that can be applied to the apparatus terminals Imax Maximum safe current that can be applied to the apparatus terminals The Associated Apparatus Parameters are defined as follows CSA does not Maximum output voltage that can be delivered to the hazardous classified location This voltage is the maximum from a single channel Maximum output current that can be delivered to the hazardous classified location This current is the maximum from a single channel Maximum output voltage that can be delivered to the hazardous classified location This voltage is the maximum across any combination of terminals of a multiple channel configuration Maximum output current that can be delivered to the hazardous classified location This current is the maximum through any combination of terminals of a multiple channel configuration Unprotected capacitance in the apparatus that can be considered present at the terminals Unprotected inductance in the apparatus that can be considered present at the terminals Maximum capacitance that can be connected to the apparatus Maximum inductance that can be connected to the apparatus recognize these parameters at this time Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Referen
206. iques that help to ensure that this level of performance can be achieved Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 191 10 3 Calibration Continued Clear Calibration Use the procedure in Table 74 to clear the calibration so that the sensor Procedure will operate using default characterization values Also called Corrects Reset Table 74 Clearing Sensor Calibration Procedure Using a fieldbus configuration application as the operator interface to device set the Transducer block MODE BLK parameter to O S Out of Service Write CAL CLEAR 5 to parameter CAL to clear calibration settings See Table 70 Calibration Parameters If calibration was successful CAL STATUS Success 1 CAL SOURCE None 1 Proceed to next step If calibration failed CAL STATUS a value other than Success 1 See Table 70 for descriptions of CAL STATUS values Repeat procedure from step 1 When calibration is completed Set Transducer block to Auto mode to resume normal device operation Note Using this calibration procedure will cause the local meter display to show unc Uncertain status 192 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 10 3 Calibration Continued Calibrate Zero Background Correct Zero Calibration Procedure This calibration procedure is performed after the transmitter is mounted and installed in a process contro
207. is present in See Subsection 11 7 for details BLOCK ERR then read on ERROR DETAIL parameter ERROR DETAIL Set RESTART to Processor or 4 to soft restart the device Incorrect revision of Resource Read DEV DEV REV and See Incorrect or non compatible block firmware DD REV tools above in Subsection 11 3 Incorrect revision level of the Read REVISION ARRAY See Incorrect or non compatible device firmware tools above in Subsection 11 3 Transducer block mode is OOS Read MODE BLK ACTUAL Set MODE BLK TARGET to Auto NOTE Transducer block must be in Auto mode for the sensor signal to be passed to block Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 199 11 3 Device Troubleshooting Continued Non Functioning Blocks Continued Table 79 Device Troubleshooting Table C continued Symptom e Device output is not updating y Things to check Recommended Action Transducer block is not 1 Read the 1 element of If 2 element of BLOCK TEST is producing valid primary BLOCK TEST Number should be nonzero write all zeroes to data increasing indicating that block is element running If block is not running check the 2nd element of BLOCK TEST 2 Read BLOCK ERR See Subsection 11 7 for details on BLOCK ERR 3 Verify parameter Isolate transmitter from process PRIMARY VALUE is not valid and check calibration STATUS Good or Uncertain VALUE active
208. ition Once the transmitter is mounted the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired position See Table 8 step 4 On insulated tanks remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension Figure 16 Typical Pipe and Flange Mounted Installations Tank Wall Flange Transmitter Connection Flange Process Pipe 1 2 NPT Connection Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 39 5 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Remote seal Use the procedure in Table 10 to mount a remote diaphragm seal mounting transmitter model Figure 17 shows a typical installation for a remote diaphragm seal transmitter for reference 1 Mount the transmitter flanges within the limits stated here for the given fill fluid in the capillary tubes with a tank at one atmosphere IF the fill fluid is THEN mount the flange Silicone DC 200 Oil no greater than 22 feet 6 7 meters below the transmitter Silicone DC 704 Oil no greater than 19 feet 5 8 meters below the transmitter Chlorotrifluorethylene CTFE no greater than 11 feet 3 4 meters below the transmitter NOTE The combination of tank vacuum and high pressure capillary head effect should not exceed 9 psi 300 mm Hg absolute Table 11 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Step Action 1 Mount transmitter at a remote distance determined by length of capilla
209. itter You can check the status of all the indicators on the local meter LCD display by cycling power to the transmitter the display indicators are lit for two seconds during the self test Figure 25 shows a local meter display with all display indicators lit Table 27 gives a brief description of all the possible indicators when in operation Figure 25 Smart Meter Display Digital Readout 19990 to 19990 Status Indicators 17 Segment Bargraph 0 to 10096 OUTPUTMODE ANALOG CHECK STATUS 2 FAULT LAST KNOWN VALUE GPM Psi Engineering Unit Indicators 24120 Continued on next page 74 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 7 4 Monitoring Local Meter Display Continued Display Description continued Table 28 Description of Display Indicators Shown in Figure 25 Display Indicator What It Means When Lit 17 Segment Bargraph Gives gross indication of the Al block OUT parameter from 0 to 10096 Bargraph range indicates the same range as defined in the OUT SCALE parameter or XD SCALE if L TPYE Direct percent 96 symbol located between 0 and 100 on the display is part of the bargraph scale Digital Readout Gives a precise indication of the transmitter s Al block OUT parameter in either percent of span or actual engineering units The display range is 19 990 000 and it is automatically ranged to See Table 7 for sample display provide the best precisio
210. itter is below the process connection so the bubbles may rise back into the piping through the liquid If the transmitter is located above the process connection the piping should rise vertically above the transmitter then slope down towards the flowline with a vent valve at the high point For gas measurement use a condensate leg and drain at the low point freeze protection may be required here See Appendix C for some suggested freeze protection solutions Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 43 5 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Process Connections Care must be taken when installing transmitters on hot processes The operating temperature limits for the device as outlined in Table 4 must not be exceeded Impulse piping may be used to reduce the temperature of the process that comes into contact with the transmitter meter body As a general rule there is a 56 degree C drop 100 degree F in the temperature of the process for every foot of 42 inch uninsulated piping Table 12 describes typical process connections for a given type of transmitter Table 13 Process Connections for Transmitters Transmitter Type Process Connection Differential e Process heads with 1 4 inch NPT female connection Pressure e Flange adapters and manifolds with 1 2 inch female connection are optional e Models with pseudo flange on one side include 2 or 3 inch ANSI cl
211. k that the value is within the valid range given in the table Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 117 8 8 Block Parameter Summary Continued Parameter Summary Tables 47 through 50 provide a summary of the Honeywell defined block parameters contained in the ST 3000 FF Table 46 describes the parameter attributes which are the column headings in each table A summary of the Foundation Fieldbus defined parameters can be found in FF 890 and FF 891 Foundation Specification Function Block Application Process Parts 1 and 2 Table 48 Transducer Block Parameter Summary Parameter Obj Data Type Use Model Valid Initial Mnemonic Type Structure Range Value PRIMARY VALUE Value and C Contained 5 Status float CALC VAL Value and C Contained 5 Status float SENSOR TEMP Value and C Contained 4 Status float SENSOR TEMP UNIT Unsigned16 C Contained CAL POINT HI S Float C Contained S 4 sensor CAL POINT LO S Float C Contained S 4 sensor range CAL SOURCE S Unsigned8 C Contained 1 1 3 un calibrated CAL_UNIT 5 Unsigned16 C Contained S 2 pressure 0 0 units 4 deg C XD DIAG DETAIL Bit String C Containea D 2 SENSOR SN Unsigned32 CiContained S 4 BLOCK TEST 8 Unsigned8 C Contained D 4 zs Please read CAUTION about these parameters on page 88 Continued on next page 118 ST 3000 FF
212. ket Remove the smart meter cable wires from the slot on the mounting bracket and unplug the smart meter cable from the Transducer board 7 If you are Then Replacing the local smart go to Step 10 meter only Replacing the electronics go to Step 8 module 8 Remove retaining clip from PWA and flex tape connector unplug flex tape and power cables from component side of Transducer PWA and then remove the electronics module Electronics Transducer PWA Module and Connector Side Mounting Flex T Bracket Connector Meter Connector Power Connector 9 Remove the replacement electronics module from its protective wrapping 1 Re use the protective envelope to package the old electronics module for return shipment Continued on next page 174 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 94 Replacing Transmitter Electronics Continued Procedure continued Table 67 Replacing Smart Meter and Electronics Module continued Step Action 10 If equipped with or if you are replacing the smart meter Plug the smart meter cable on to the meter connector of the Transducer board and carefully route the smart meter wires underneath the clip on the mounting bracket Mounting Up Bracket ET Smart Meter Replacement Electronics Module Make sure meter cable is installed between PWA and mounting bracket Smart Meter Restraining Cable Clip 11 Locate
213. ks 60 seconds T3 Value of the SM set address wait timer in 1 32 of a 261 480 000 millisecond ticks 15 seconds The default value is specified by the communications profile for the application area Continued on next page 144 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 18 System Management SM Continued System Application Each link in a fieldbus network contains an Application Clock Time Clock Time Publisher responsible for distributing Application Time on the link Synchronization A clock synchronization message is periodically sent by the time publisher to all fieldbus devices The application clock time is independently maintained in each device based on its own internal crystal clock Clock synchronization provides the capability for devices to time stamp data events and alarms when they occur Sync and Scheduling These objects are used by system management to provide application Objects clock synchronization and macrocycle scheduling for the device Table 61 identifies the sync and scheduling objects with their object directory index and default values Table 62 SM Sync and Scheduling Objects CURRENT TIME The current application clock time 262 LOCAL TIME DIFF Used to calculate local time from 263 CURRENT TIME AP CLOCK SYNC The interval in seconds between time 264 Set by SM mgr during INTERVAL messages on the link bus address assignment TIME LAST RCVD The ap
214. l Fluids Differential Pressure STD125 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 85 40 to 185 STD120 STD130 STD170 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 125 40 to 257 STD924 STD930 STD974 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 125 40 to 257 Gauge Pressure STG140 STG170 STG180 STG14L STG17L STG18L 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 125 40 to 257 STG14T 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 150 t 40 to 302 T STG93P 15 to 65 5 to 149 15 to 95 tt 5 to 203 tt STG944 STG974 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 125 40 to 257 STG94L STG97L STG98L 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 110 40 to 230 Absolute Pressure STA122 12L 40 to 93 40 to 200 See Specification Sheet STA140 14L 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 80 40 to 176 STA922 92L 40 to 85 40 to 185 See Specification Sheet STA940 94L 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 80 40 to 176 STA17L 97L 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 80 40 to 176 Flange Mounted STF128 STF132 STF924 STF932 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 175 40 to 350 Pseudo Flanged Head STF12F STF13F STF92F STF93F 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 93 40 to 200 STF14F 40 to 85 40 to 185 40 to 85 40 to 185 Gauge Pressure Flange Mount STF14T 40 to 93 40 to 200 40 to 150 T 40 to 302 t Remote Diaphragm Seals STR12D STR13D STR14G STR17G STR14A See Specification Sheet See Specification Sheet STR93D STR94G 40 to 85 40 to 185 See Specification Sheet T Process temperatures above 125 C 257 F require a reduction in the maximum ambient temperature as follows Process Temperature A
215. l system Also called Input Zero Bench calibration is performed with the device removed from the process and calibrated using reference pressure conditions Often when the device is mounted and connected to the process the input measurement due to fill fluid and position effects cause the measurement to shift This calibration provides a means of correcting for these effects without changing the calibration Use the procedure in Table 74 when calibrating the sensor to correct the input measurement due to fill fluid and transmitter position effects NOTE 1 This procedure is not used for calibrating AP transmitters since it is nearly impossible to measure a true zero pressure NOTE 2 This procedure can be performed using the local meter See Table 75 for local zero correction procedure Table 75 Correct Zero Sensor Calibration Procedure Set the differential pressure input to zero by connecting a tube between the input connections in the high pressure HP and the low pressure LP heads Using a fieldbus configuration application as the operator interface to device set the Transducer block MODE BLK parameter to O S Out of Service Write CAL ZERO 3 to parameter CAL to calibrate zero See Table 70 Calibration Parameters The device will use the average of the last 10 pressure samples to perform the correction If calibration was successful CAL STATUS Success 1 CAL SOURCE User 2 Proceed to next st
216. le 14 Flange Description Transmitter Type Description Flush or Extended 2 inch 150 serrated face flange with 4 holes 19 mm 3 4 in diameter on 120 7 Diaphragm mm 4 75 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 150 mm 5 91 in 2 inch 150 serrated face flange with 8 holes 19 mm 3 4 in diameter on 127 mm 5 00 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 165 mm 6 50 in 3 inch 150 serrated face flange with 4 holes 19 mm 3 4 in diameter on 152 4 mm 6 00 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 190 mm 7 48 in 3 inch 3007 serrated face flange with 8 holes 22 2 mm 7 8 in diameter on 168 3 mm 6 62 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 210 mm 8 27 in 4 inch 150 serrated face flange with 4 holes 19 mm 3 4 in diameter on 190 5 mm 7 50 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 230 mm 9 05 in 4 inch 300 serrated face flange with 8 holes 22 2 mm 7 8 in diameter on 255 mm 10 04 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 200 mm 7 87 in DN 50 PN 40 serrated face flange with 4 holes 18 mm 0 71 in diameter on 125 mm 4 92 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 165 mm 6 50 in DN 80 PN 40 serrated face flange with 8 holes 18 mm 0 71 in diameter on 160 mm 6 30 in diameter bolt circle and an outside diameter of 200 mm 7 87 in DN 100 PN 40 serrated face flange with 8 holes 22 mm 0 87 in diameter on 19
217. le Bracket Mounting Kit for models LGP Flush mount STR14G STR17G and STR94G 3 51196557 001 Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models except LGP and Flush Mount 4 51196557 002 Flat Bracket Mounting Kit for all models LGP Flush mount STR14G STR17G and STR94G 220 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Figure 34 Series 100 and 900 Electronics Housing Electronics Meter End Figure 35 Series 100 and 900 Electronics Housing Terminal Block End 1 K1 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 221 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Table 93 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figures 34 and 35 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 30756961 501 Cap for Series 900 only 1 30756961 502 Cap for Series 100 only 2 30756996 501 Cap meter for Series 900 only 1 30756996 502 Cap meter for Series 100 only 3 51205897 5011 Terminal assembly without lightning protection 1 51404078 5021 Terminal assembly with lightning protection 4 51309441 501 Electronics Module Assembly 1 5 51309389 502 Local Smart Meter Only 1 51309389 503 Local Smart Meter With Zero and Span Adjust 6 51204038 001 Retaining Clip 1 K1 30757503 001T Electronics housing seals kit includes O rings K2 51197425 001 Terminal assembly without lightning protectio
218. les in bracket Secure with nuts and lockwashers provided Example Angle mounting bracket secured to horizontal or vertical pipe Nuts and Nuts and Lockwashers Lockwashers Mounting Bracket Mounting Bracket Horizontal Pipe Vertical Pipe U Bolt Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 31 5 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Bracket mounting continued Table 8 Mounting ST 3000 FF Transmitter to a Bracket continued Step Action Align appropriate mounting holes in transmitter with holes in bracket and secure with bolts and washers provided If transmitter is Then DP type with double ended use alternate mounting process heads and or holes in end of heads remote seals GP and AP with single use mounting holes in side ended head of meter body In line GP and AP use smaller U bolt provided to attach meter body to bracket See figure below Dual head GP and AP use mounting holes in end of process head Inline models Meter Body Smaller U bolt Use bracket for hexagonal meter body NOTE If the meter body is hexagonal you must use the additional bracket supplied If meter body is round discard the bracket Continued on next page 32 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 5 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Bracket
219. loat Simulate and transducer floating point value and status and a simulate enable disable discrete Test Function block test read write data Indicates the type of memory where the parameter is stored S Static Writing to the parameter changes the static revision counter parameter ST REV N Non volatile Non volatile parameters are stored internally to actual non volatile memory on periodic basis to protect the life of the memory This interval is set by the resource block parameter NV CYCLE T at 15 minutes displayed as 28800000 in 1 32 milliseconds It cannot be changed by the user Parameter must be retained during a power cycle D Dynamic The value is calculated by the block or read from another block Default Value Default values for the configurable block parameters These are the values that are used when e the FBAP is initialized for the first time or e selecting restart with defaults of the resource block parameter RESTART 84 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 4 Resource Block Resource Block Function Resource Block Parameters The resource block contains data and parameters related to overall operation of the device and the FBAP Parameters that describe the hardware specific characteristics of the device and support application download operations make up the resource block Table 33 lists the FF and Honeywell defined parameters and their default values co
220. lock Derivative control Stack The software component that implement the Foundation Fieldbus communications protocol specifications including FMS FAS DLL SM and NM System Management SM Provides services that coordinate the operation of various devices in a distributed fieldbus system System Management SMA Part of the device software that operates on system management Agent objects System Management collection of objects and parameters comprising configuration and Information Base operational information used for control of system management operations Status A coded value that qualifies dynamic variables parameters in function blocks This value is usually passed along with the value from block to block Status is fully defined in the FF FBAP specifications Trim Point A selected reference point at which a measurement is calibrated Virtual VCR A defined communication endpoint Fieldbus communications can Communication primarily only take place along a active communications path that Reference consists of two VCR endpoints For example to establish communications between a transducer block and a function block a VCR must be defined at the transducer block and a VCR must be defined at the function block Virtual Field Device VFD A logical grouping of user layer functions Function blocks are grouped into a VFD and system and network management are grouped into a VFD July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and
221. luded as part of a fieldbus power supply Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 47 5 44 Wiring ST 3000 FF Transmitter Continued Fieldbus Network Components Continued Fieldbus Network Wiring Schemes Daisy Chain Wiring e Fieldbus terminators This component acts as a signal termination Two are required for each fieldbus segment One is connected at or near each end of a network segment Junction block This is a terminal block used as a junction point for fieldbus cable leads to individual devices e Fieldbus LS barriers Limits the available power to the fieldbus segment to eliminate explosion hazards Barriers must be designed for fieldbus networks There are various schemes that can be used to wire devices in a fieldbus network Devices can be connected Ina daisy chain in parallel Toabus where the devices are attached in a multidrop scheme fashion where devices are connected to a network segment via a common junction block The fieldbus cable is routed from device to device in parallel along a bus segment The cable is interconnected at the terminals of each field device This installation must be powered down to modify or replace transmitter This scheme is illustrated in Figure 20 Figure 20 Daisy Chain Wiring Scheme To Control System T Terminator lec Power Conditioner Fieldbus Interface
222. lugs Gaskets 30757148 001 Replacement heads stainless steel Kit includes Heads with side vents Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent Plugs Gaskets 30757148 002 Replacement heads stainless steel Kit includes Heads without side vents Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Bushings Vent Plugs Gaskets 30757149 001 Replacement heads Hastelloy Kit includes Heads with side vents Head gaskets Teflon Head gaskets Viton Plugs Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets 30757500 001 Replacement heads Monel Kit includes Head with side vents Head gasket Teflon Head gasket Viton Plugs Bushings Vent plugs Gaskets K3 30757505 001 Process Head Gasket Kit Kit includes 6 Teflon head gaskets 30757 100 001 6 Viton head gaskets 30749274 004 and 6 Teflon flange adapter gaskets 30679622 501 Optional Flange Adapter and Flange Adapter Gaskets Not Shown 30679622 501 Flange adapter gaskets Teflon 30749274 502 Flange adapter gaskets Viton 30754419 002 Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapters with carbon steel bolts 30754419 018 Flange adapter kit st steel flange adapters with 316 st steel NACE bolts K9 Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg flange adapter 4 K11 Not Shown Gasket flange adapter 2 K10 Not Shown Flange adapter 2 K12 Not Shown Filter screen 2 30754419 003 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapters with carbon steel bolts 30754419 019 Flange adapter kit Hastelloy C flange adapters
223. mage Note that grounding may be required to meet optional approval body certification Refer to section 3 2 CE Conformity Europe Notice for special conditions Optional lightning protection option LP can be ordered for transmitters that will be installed in areas highly susceptible to lightning strikes Figure 23 shows the 5 screw terminal block used when the lightning protection option is ordered Figure 23 ST 3000 Transmitter Terminal Blocks Electronics Terminal Housing Block 3 Screw Terminal Block Electronics Terminal G Housing Block Internal Internal Ground Ground Terminal Terminal 5 Screw Terminal Block Lightning Protection Option LP Continued on next page 52 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 5 44 Wiring ST 3000 FF Transmitter Continued Table 18 ST 3000 FF Wiring Terminals TEST and Not used Screw terminals SIGNAL and Fieldbus cable connections Internal Ground An internal ground terminal is available next to the terminal block See Connection Figure 23 The terminal can be used to connect the transmitter to earth ground External Ground While it is not necessary to ground the transmitter for proper operation Connections an external ground terminal on the outside of the electronics housing provides additional noise suppression as well as protection against lightning and static discharge damage Note
224. manufacturer s device ID is used 4 System management assigns an unused address to the new device Assignment is done automatically or by you Address Assignment Table 62 is a description of the Address Assignment objects with their Objects object directory index and default values Table 63 SM Address Assignment Objects DEV ID The device ID set by the 270 48574C0002 HWL ST3000 manufacturer PROM ID PD TAG The physical device tag to be set 271 5 using SET PD service 47 seven digits of PROM ID OPERATIONAL POWERUP Controls the state of SM of the 272 TRUE SM goes operational device upon power up after powerup Tag Search Services There are three SM services functions available to set the physical tag of the device give it a permanent node address and search the network for a given tag name Continued on next page 146 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 18 System Management SM Continued Set Physical Tag Set Permanent Address Tag Locator Virtual Field Device VFD List Objects Using a configuration program a request to set PD TAG parameter is sent to the new device function block If device tag is clear then a device tag 1s assigned to the function block at the device address After a physical tag has been assigned to a new device a request can be made to give the device a permanent address using the configurator
225. mbient Temperature Limit 150 302 F 50 C 122 F 140 C 284 F 60 C 140 F 125 C 257 F 85 C 185 F tt Process temperatures above 65 C 149 F require a 1 1 reduction in maximum ambient temperature NOTE For transmitters with local meter option see Table 7 NOTE Transmitters with other fill fluids CTFE Neobee Etc have different Operating Temperature Limits For more specific information refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection Guide or transmitter nameplate July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 25 4 2 Considerations for ST 3000 FF Transmitter Continued Power Requirements The ST 3000 FF is a bus powered device meaning that it receives its power from the dc voltage on a fieldbus wiring segment There are certain guidelines and limitations regarding the wiring of fieldbus devices See Section 5 4 for more information on wiring the transmitter Table 5 lists the operating power requirements for the ST 3000 FF transmitter Table 6 ST 3000 FF Power Requirements Static Power 9 Vdc 20mA 32 Vdc 20mA at the transmitter terminal block For additional information on power requirements see the Honeywell ST 3000 FF Fieldbus Pressure Transmitter Software Release Guide Continued on next page 26 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 4 2 Considerations for ST 3000 FF Transmitter Continued Pressure Rating
226. mounting continued Table 8 Mounting ST 3000 FF Transmitter to a Bracket continued Step Action 4 Loosen 4 mm set screw on outside neck of transmitter one full turn Rotate electronics housing a maximum of 180 degrees in the left or right direction from center to the position you require and tighten set screw 13 to 15 Ib in 1 46 to 1 68 N m Example Rotating electronics housing 4 Electronics Housing 180 degrees max Set Screw 180 degrees max a Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 33 5 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Precautions for Mounting Transmitters with Small Absolute or Differential Pressure Spans The mounting position of a model STA122 STA922 STA12L or STA922 Absolute Pressure Transmitter or a model STD110 Draft Range Differential Pressure Transmitter is critical as the transmitter spans become smaller A maximum zero shift of 2 5 mm Hg for an absolute transmitter or 1 5 in H2O for a draft range transmitter can result from a mounting position which is rotated 90 degrees from vertical A typical zero shift of 0 12 mm Hg or 0 20 in 2 can occur for 5 degree rotation from vertical To minimize these positional effects on calibration zero shift take the appropriate mounting precautions that follow for the given transmitter model For a model STA122 or STA922 tra
227. mper Changes to jumper position take effect only upon power up NOTE The write protect jumper is used in conjunction with the FEATURE SEL parameter in the resource block and it is explained below Refer to Table 23 to set the write protect jumper Table 24 How to Set Write Protect Jumper Step Action 1 Remove power to transmitter 2 Loosen end cap lock and unscrew end cap from electronics side of housing If applicable carefully turn Local Meter counterclockwise to remove it from electronics module and unplug cable from connector on back of meter assembly We recommend that you use a ground strap or ionizer when handling the electronics module since electrostatic discharges can damage certain circuit components Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 67 6 6 Setting Write Protect Feature Continued Table 23 How to Set Write Protect Jumper continued Step Action 4 Note orientation of electronics module in housing Loosen two retaining screws and carefully pull the electronics module from housing 5 Set Write Protect Jumper to the appropriate position on the electronics board See Figure 24 and Table 25 Note that the HARD LOCK must also be set to the proper value to obtain desired condition of either Read Write or Read only access to the transmitter s configuration See Table 26 6 Insert the electronics module back in
228. mperature last passed above the value of RNG DATE minimum specification limit plus 1096 of range Example 40 C 12 5 C 27 5 R rating Model Selection Guide Table which specifies meter body materials of Y construction fill fluid and process head configuration included the unit purchased with the unit July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 89 8 5 Transducer Block Transducer Block The transducer block de couples or insulates function blocks from Function local I O devices such as sensors or actuators In the ST 3000 FF the transducer block takes the sensor measurements from the signal processing software performs a two point linearization and if selected executes additional math functions The transducer block also contains parameters used for transmitter calibration Transducer Block Table 35 lists the FF and Honeywell defined parameters and their Parameters default values in the transducer block Table 36 Transducer Block Parameters ST REV Unsigned16 S TAG DESC Octet string S all blanks S 5 1 MODE Mode ix TARGET 20 8 BLOCK ERR Bit string Event update ALARM SUM Alarm summary all disabled BLOCK ALARM Alarm discrete Honeywell Parameters PRIMARY VALUE Value and Status float CALC VAL Value and Status float SENSOR TEMP Value and Status float 13 SENSOR TEMP UNIT Unsigned16
229. n Continued Revision Combination 3 1 2 3 4 RS Block REVISION ARRAY 0 gt 0402 below 0501 above 0501 above 0501 above Type RS Block REVISION ARRAY 2 gt 0103 below 0103 below 0104 above 0105 above RS Block DEV REV DD REV gt 08 02 below 09 01 above 09 01 above 09 01 above Advanced Diagnostic Feature v Process Variable Tracking 25 PV MAX N A F F F F F F Parameter 26 PV MIN N A F F F F F F Parameter 27 Al Block Information N A F F F F F F Method 28 PV OVER RNG CTR N A F F F F F F Parameter 29 PV OVER RNG DATE N A F F F F F F Parameter 30 PV UNDER RNG CTR N A F F F F F F Parameter 31 PV UNDER RNG DATE N A F F F F F F Parameter Meter Body Temperature Tracking 32 TEMP OVER RNG CTR N A F F F F F F Parameter 33 TEMP OVER RNG DATE N A F F F F F F Parameter 34 TEMP UNDER RNG CTR N A F F F F F F Parameter 35 TEMP UNDER RNG DATE N A F F F F F F Parameter 36 TEMP MAX N A F F F F F F Parameter 37 TEMP MIN N A F F F F F F Parameter 38 ST PR N A 0 0 Note 6 Note 5 Note 5 Parameter Static Pressure Tracking 39 ST PR MAX N A 0 0 Note 6 Note 5 Note 5 Parameter 40 ST PR OVER CTR N A 0 Note 6 Note 5 Note 5 Parameter 41 ST PR OVER RNG DATE N A 1 1 72 Note 6 Note 5 Note 5 Parameter 42 STRESS MONITOR N A No
230. n 11 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 21 32 Off line Configuration Continued Assign Bus Address You can check the device ID sensor ID and SENSOR SN of the and Device Tag transmitter assign a network node address to the device and assign tag names to the device NOTE The transmitter is shipped with default node addresses and tag names that appear at start up These can be changed to actual network addresses and tag names Device Configuration You can view the various block parameters that make up the transmitter configuration enter parameter values for your process application and write them to the device 22 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Section 4 Pre Installation Considerations 4 1 Introduction Section Contents About this Section This section includes these topics Section Topic See Page Zl Introduction ie eie 21 4 2 Considerations for ST 3000 FF Transmitter eee 22 4 3 Considerations for Local Meter Option This section reviews things you should take into consideration before you install the transmitter Of course if you are replacing an existing ST 3000 FF transmitter you can skip this section July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 23 4 2 Considerations for ST 3000 FF Transmitter Evalua
231. n 6 FIGURE 4 FIELDBUS CONNECTING CONTROL ROOM AND FIELD DEVICES eene 7 FIGURE 5 FIELDBUS DEVICES CONTAIN DEVICE APPLICATIONS AND FUNCTION BLOCKS 9 FIGURE 6 TYPICAL ST 3000 FF TRANSMITTER ORDER COMPONENTS eese nennen 10 FIGURE 7 TYPICAL LOCAL METER FACEPLATE entente nnne tnnt eene seen 11 FIGURE8 ST 3000 FF WITH LOCAL METER OPTION sessi 12 FIGURE9 FIELDBUS NETWORK COMPONENTS eese tenente nennen tenente nnns 17 FIGURE 10 CONFIGURATION SETUP FIGURE cicon eser n i T enne tente trennen eene 20 FIGURE 11 TYPICAL MOUNTING AREA CONSIDERATIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION 24 FIGURE 12 TYPICAL BRACKET MOUNTED INSTALLATIONS eese enne nennen nenne 30 FIGURE 13 LEVELING AN ABSOLUTE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER eere enne 34 FIGURE 14 TYPICAL FLANGE MOUNTED TRANSMITTER INSTALLATION eren 37 FIGURE 15 TYPICAL FLUSH MOUNTED TRANSMITTER INSTALLATION ener 38 FIGURE 16 TYPICAL PIPE AND FLANGE MOUNTED INSTALLATIONS eene een 39 FIGURE 17 TYPICAL REMOTE DIAPHRAGM SEAL TRANSMITTER INSTALLATION 41 FIGURE 18 TYPICAL 3 VALVE MANIFOLD AND BLOW DOWN PIPING ARRANGEMENT 42 FIGURE 19 TYPICAL PIPING ARRANGEMENT FOR gt NPT PROCESS 43 FIGURE 20 DAISY CHAIN WIRING SCHEME
232. n Blocks The physical architecture of fieldbus allows installation of fieldbus devices using a twisted pair cable Often existing wiring from analog devices can be used to wire up digital fieldbus devices Multiple field devices can be connected on one cable a multi drop link rather than conventional point to point wiring used for analog devices For more details on wiring fieldbus networks see Section 5 4 Fieldbus software architecture provides for more control functions to be available in the microprocessor based field device Since fieldbus is a digital communication system more data is available to operators for process monitoring trend analysis report generation and trouble analysis Device software changes can be downloaded to field devices remotely from the operator station or PC in the control room An application is software that contains function block data and operating parameters objects which help define the operation of a device such as sensor data acquisition or control algorithm processing Some devices may contain more than one application Usually a device has a set of functions it can perform These functions are represented as function blocks within the device See Figure 5 Function blocks are software that provide a general structure for specifying different device functions Each function block is capable of performing a control function or algorithm Device functions may include analog input an
233. n Steel Standard B7M Boling Stainless Steel NACE 316 Stainless Steel Non no option specified 187 Option Option NACE SS Option DraftRange 7 16 x 14 UNC 203 1 0 203N m 10 N m 20 3 N m 1 0N m 20 3 N m 1 0 N m Transmitter 15 0 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft 15 0 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft 150 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft 150 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft 7 16 x 20 UNF NA 25 8 N m 13N m 19 0 Lb Ft 1 0 Lo Fi 12 1 75 25 8 1 3 19 0 Lb Ft 1 0 Lb Fi AllOtherDP M12x1 75 637N m4 32N m NA NA NA 2 2 47 0 Lb Ft 2 4 Lb Fi 7 16 x 20 UNF NA 63 7 3 2 NA 47 0 Lb Ft 2 4 Lo Fi 7 16 x 14 UNC 67 8N m 34N m 488N m 24Nm 569N m 28N m 56 9N m 2 8N m 50 0 Lb Ft 2 5 Lb Ft 36 0 Lb Ft 1 8 Lb Ft 420 Lb Ft 2 1 Lb Ft 42 0 Lb Ft 2 1 Lb Ft 38 16 39 3N m 20N m 39 3N m 20N m 393 20 29 Lb Ft 1 5 Lb Ft 29 Lb Ft 1 5Lb Ft 29 Lb Ft 1 5 Lb Ft M8x125 271N m4 14N m NA NA 20 0 Lb Ft 1 0 Lb Ft 5 16 x 18 UNC NA NA 20 3 N m 1 0N m 20 3 N m 1 0 Num 15 0 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 171 9 4 ST 3000 Electronics Procedure Replacing Transmitter Electronics The electronics of the ST 3000 FF transmitter exists on two Printed Wiring
234. n conversion kit includes Screws cover and terminal block 51197425 002 Terminal assembly with lightning protection conversion kit includes Screws cover and terminal block Not 30757504 001 Electronics housing hardware kit DP I GP I LGP I includes screws Shown gasket plate washers cover terminal and spacers Continued on next page 222 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Figure 36 Series 100 and Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 amp STD930 C D G H and L and STD974 K2 K1 K3 K4 Toa Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 223 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Table 94 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 36 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete Series 100 replacement meter body without heads 1 model number from nameplate Specify complete Series 900 replacement meter body without heads 1 model number from nameplate 2 30757104 001 Adapter meter body to electronics housing 1 30753790 001 Carbon steel bolts and nuts kit Not Shown Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg flange adapter 4 K4 Nut hex metric M12 process heads 4 K8 Bolt hex head metric M12 90mm lg process heads 4 30753791 002 A286
235. n possible within the limits of the display A readouts second decimal place expands the precision of range values within 19 99 to 1 100th of a unit 96 The percent sign appears when the digital readout represents output in percent of range OUTPUT MODE Transmitter block is in MAN mode or simulate feature is enabled CHECK STATUS Status message appears when a critical device fault occurs Inches of Water is selected engineering units for digital readout This is the default engineering units selection Gallons per hour is selected engineering units for digital readout Note that the FLOW indicator must also be lit to allow this selection Gallons per minute is selected engineering units for digital readout Note that the FLOW indicator must also be lit to allow this selection Millimeters of Mercury is selected engineering units for digital readout Pounds per Square Inch is selected engineering units for digital readout A Transmitter is absolute pressure type Digital readout represents absolute values Stick On Label not shown Labels of selected engineering units can be applied to the display to indicate one of the following units Kpa Kilopascals Honeywell drawing number Mpa Megapascals 30756918 001 mbar Millibar bar Bar g cm Grams per Square Centimeter Kg cm Kilograms per Square Centimeter mmH20 Millimeters of Water inHg Inches of Mercury 2 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Re
236. nd older software versions The device may appear as a new device since the NI Configuration system uses the device ID as the key identification variable for a device 182 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Section 10 Calibration 10 1 Introduction Section Contents This section includes these topics Section Topic See Page 10 1 Introduction scata e e rennen 161 10 2 OVETVIEW votre de ttes ted tede eee 162 10 3 Calibr ti nzs aiio CE Perte Rete 163 About this Section This section provides information about calibrating the transmitter s measurement range It also covers the procedure for resetting calibration to factory default values as a quick alternative to measurement range calibration July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 183 10 2 Overview About Calibration Calibration Sources Calibration Process Your transmitter was factory calibrated to its standard range or a range specified on the purchase order So there should be no need to recalibrate the transmitter during installation When recalibration is required we recommend that you do a bench calibration with the transmitter removed from the process and located in a controlled environment to get the best accuracy ST 3000 FF transmitter can be calibrated to a number of sources The calibration values can be set cleared res
237. ndition This will be reflected in a status of uncertain in the measurement See Excess Calibration below CAL SOURCE The source of the current 1 None No calibration Only sensor device calibration characterization is being used 2 User User selected calibration values used 3 Factory Factory calibration used Excess Calibration An excess calibration status exists when one of the following conditions CAL_STATUS 9 i pr sent e Zero correction is greater than 5 of URL which is SENSOR RANGE EU 100 e Span correction is greater than 5 of URL which is SENSOR_RANGE EU_ 100 e Calibrated range in a compound characterized device is greater than the full sensor range In any of these conditions the status of the transducer block output will be Uncertain Inaccurate Each of these conditions is indicated separately in Bits 0 1 and 2 of the XD DIAG DETAIL parameter See Section 11 Troubleshooting Transmitter Faults July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 187 10 3 Calibration Continued Two Point Calibration ST 3000 FF Transmitter has two point calibration The calibration is used to correct for any sensor accuracy drift over time Two point calibration means you calibrate at two points in the calibration range the lower and upper trim points and then all points within that range adjust to that calibration Determine Lower and The two trim points are not fixed values
238. ng Objects VERSION OF SCHEDULE The version number of the function block schedule FB Schedule Entry 2 By default the entry which defines the PID function block execution schedule START TIME OFFSET 16000 FB OBJECT INDEX 301 PID block FB Schedule Entry 1 By default the entry which 276 START TIME OFFSET 0 defines the AI function block VFD REF 2 VFD REF 2 FB Schedule Entry 3 4 278 279 START TIME OFFSET 0xFFFFFFFF FB OBJECT INDEX 0 VFD_REF 0 148 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 19 Network Management Description Network Management Features Network Management Objects Network Management provides for the management of a device s communication system by an external network manager application Network Management operates on special objects in the Network Management Information Base NMIB which is part of the Management Virtual Field Device VFD Network Management provides the following features Loading a Virtual Communication Relationship VCR which may be a list or a single entry See VCR List Objects e Loading changing the communication stack configuration e Loading the Link Active Schedule LAS e Performance monitoring e Fault detection monitoring Normally most of the network management objects appear transparent to you In other words the parameters and objects used for network management are not normally viewed or cha
239. nged as part of device configuration The network management objects in the ST 3000 FF FBAP are listed in the following paragraphs although most if not all of these objects are not directly user configurable Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 149 8 19 Network Management Continued Network Management Information Base NMIB The NMIB contains various objects that are associated with network management operation Table 64 lists the NMIB object dictionary The groups of network management objects along with their index starting numbers are included in the NMIB for the ST 3000 FF The numbers in parenthesis n indicate the number of objects Table 65 ST 3000 FF NMIB Object Dictionary Number of Objects Stack Management 1 291 VCR List OD Index Number of Objects in VCR List 5 330 DLL Basic OD Index Number of Objects in DLL Basic 3 332 DLL Link Master OD Index hcm Number of Objects in DLL Link Master 7 340 Link Schedule OD Index p comm Number of Objects in Link Schedule Not Used DLL Bridge OD Index Number of Objects in DLL Bridge 337 Phy LME OD Index Number of Objects in Phy LME 2 Virtual The objects listed above contain parameters which define network Communications management operations These operations include communications Fererenes V eR between applications in different field dev
240. ngement To Downstream Tap To Upstream Tap Blow Down 3 Valve Blow Down Valve Manifold Valve Blow Down Piping Blow Down Piping To Low Pressure To High Pressure Side of Transmitter Side of Transmitter To Waste To Waste Continued on next page 42 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 5 3 Piping ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Piping Arrangements Another piping arrangement uses a block off valve and a tee connector in continued the process piping to the transmitter as shown in Figure 19 Figure 19 Typical Piping Arrangement for gt NPT Process Connection Tank Wall 1 2 NPT Connection Block off Valve Transmitter location Table 11 lists the mounting location for the transmitter depending on the process Table 12 Suggested Transmitter Location for Given Process Process Suggested Location Explanation Gases Above the gas line The condensate drains away from the transmitter Liquids 1 Below but close to the 1 This minimizes the static head elevation of the process effect of the condensate connection 2 Level with or above the 2 This requires a siphon to process connection protect the transmitter from process steam The siphon retains water as a fill fluid 1 For or steam the piping should slope a minimum of 25 4 mm 1 inch per 305 mm 1 foot Slope the piping down towards the transmitter if the transm
241. nput measurement due to fill fluid and transmitter position effects once the transmitter is installed and operating under process conditions This method uses the calibration procedure as outlined in Section 10 3 Calibration Y ST 4616821 XD 4616821 ST300071B DER Apply Values Main XD Menu 5130010 L Z FE as Auto Process Alarms Diagnostics Trends Others Methods Set the differential pressure input to zero using tube to connect the high HP and low LP pressure heads Do you wish to begin the Calibrate Zero procedure with the block set to the OOS mode 1 Yes 2 No The transducer block was placed into the OOS mode Do you wish to complete the Calibration Zero procedure with the input zero value corrected Yes 2 Abort CAL STATUS is SUCCESS Set the Transducer block to Auto mode to resume normal device operation Write Changes Read All 162 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 22 Analog Input Block Methods The Main AI Menu tab was added to the Analog Input Block to provide additional access both parameters and methods The parameters provide access data similar to that contained the block parameters while the methods provide access to data provided by multi block parameters or a means to automate a procedure such as calibration or manage data reset certain diagnostic data The Main AI Menu contains both Parameter and Method items T
242. nsducer block was placed into the OOS mode CAL UNITS are inH20 4 C Do you wish to keep or change this selection else abort the Two Point Calibration procedure 1 Keep 2 Change 3 Abort CAL_UNITS selection is unchanged The current CAL POINT LO is 0 00 Please reenter or change the low trim point reference value The current CAL POINT is 400 00 Please reenter or change the hi trim point reference value 200 pply the low reference pressure to the sensor Select the OK button when ready pply the high reference pressure to the sensor Select the OK button when ready Then wait for CAL STATUS CAL STATUS is SUCCESS Set the Transducer block to uto mode to resume normal device operation Method execution has completed Write Changes Read All July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 159 8 21 Transducer Block Methods Continued This Restore Calibration Method provides an automated procedure to perform Restore to the factory calibration This method uses the calibration procedure as outlined in Section 10 3 Calibration t ST 4616821 XD 4616821 ST3000TB values Main Menu po 4616821 ST3000TB pg Fi oo Xe s 2 oos Auto Process Alarms Diagnostics Trends Others Methods Do you wish to begin the Restore Factory Calibration procedure with the block set to the 005 mode 1 Yes 2 The transducer
243. nsmitter you must ensure that the transmitter is vertical when mounting it You do this by leveling the transmitter side to side and front to back See Figure 13 for suggestions on how to level the transmitter using a spirit balance Figure 13 Leveling an Absolute Pressure Transmitter Leveling Absolute Pressure models Process Head Position spirit balance on center section of meter body only Cont d Continued on next page 34 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 5 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Figure 13 Leveling an Absolute Pressure Transmitter cont d Leveling Inline models Mount transmitter vertically to assure best accuracy Position spirit balance on pressure connection surface of AP body Precautions for For a transmitter with a small differential pressure span you must Mounting ensure that the transmitter is vertical when mounting it You do this by Transmitters with Small Absolute or leveling the transmitter side to side and front to back See Figure 13 for Differential Pressure Suggestions on how to level the transmitter using a spirit balance You Spans continued must also zero the transmitter by following the steps in Table 9 below July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 35 5 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Table 10 Zero Corrects Procedure for STD110 Step Action 1 A
244. nt a flush mounted transmitter model cut a hole for a 1 inch standard pipe in the tank or pipe where the transmitter is to be mounted Weld the 1 mounting sleeve to the wall of the tank or to the hole cut on the pipe Insert the meter body of the transmitter into the mounting sleeve and secure with the locking bolt Tighten the bolt to a torque of 8 1 to 13 5 N m 6 to 10 ft lb Figure 15 shows a typical installation for a transmitter with a flush mount on a pipe Once the transmitter is mounted the electronics housing can be rotated to the desired position See Table 8 step 4 On insulated tanks remove enough insulation to accommodate the mounting sleeve Figure 15 Typical Flush Mounted Transmitter Installation 1 Pipe Mount 316 SS Weld Nipple standard option Continued on next page 38 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 5 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Continued High Temperature Transmitter Mounting You can mount the High Temperature transmitter directly to the process flange connection or the process piping Figure 16 shows typical pipe and flange mounted transmitter installations for comparison To mount a flange mounted transmitter model bolt the transmitter s flange to the flange on the wall of the tank or process pipe It is the End User s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are suitable for the transmitter s service cond
245. ntained in the resource block Table 34 Resource Block Parameters Data Type Structure Default Value 5 srmv 3 sae 4 f S MODE BLK Mode mix TARGET O S BLOGKERR Bis 5 RSSTATE o Tet 5 2 Umm S E 4 5 i i 20 22 23 24 25 Read only parameter ONIN NM dE e 42 scheduled Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 85 8 4 Resource Block Continued Table 33 Resource Block Parameters continued Default Value Data Type Structure FAULT STATE Unsigned8 SET FSTATE Unsigned8 CLR FSTATE Unsigned8 N 32000 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 INSTALL DATE Unsigned32 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 N EE 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 61 2 6 po 86 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 E Type Structure Value etewe wx fw _ sw were 8 _ E E NENNEN Fe Por venen Le use ornon vemesm De uss crnons 2 _ July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 87 8 4 Resource Block Continued Resource Block Table 34 desc
246. nting ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Flange mounting To mount a flange mounted transmitter model bolt the transmitter s flange to the flange pipe on the wall of the tank On insulated tanks remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension Figure 14 shows a typical installation for a transmitter with the flange on the high pressure HP side so the HP diaphragm is in direct contact with the process fluid The low pressure LP side of the transmitter 18 vented to atmosphere no connection It is the End User s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are suitable for the transmitter s service condition To prevent degradation of performance in Flush Mounted Flanged Transmitters exercise care to ensure that the internal diameter of the flange gasket does not obstruct the sensing diaphragm To prevent degradation of performance in Extended Mount Flanged Transmitters ensure that there is sufficient clearance in front of the sensing diaphragm body Figure 14 Typical Flange Mounted Transmitter Installation Attention Dotted area indicates use PEG with closed tank with reference leg x udi s Maximum Level E woe Variable Head H1 y Minimum Level mounted LP Side vented to tank to atmosphere Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 37 5 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Flush mounting To mou
247. ocess head or heads and bolts Finger tighten nuts Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 169 9 3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms Continued Procedure continued Table 65 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms Continued Step Action 8 Use a torque wrench to gradually tighten nuts to torque rating shown in Table 68 in sequence shown in following illustration Tighten head bolts in stages of 1 3 full torque 2 3 full torque and then full torque Always tighten head bolts in sequence shown and in these stages 1 1 3 full torque 2 2 3 full torque 3 Full torque 9 Return transmitter to service 1 Do not exceed the overload rating when placing the transmitter back into service or during cleaning operations See Overpressure ratings in Section 4 of this manual Figure 30 Disassembly of DP Transmitter Process Heads from Meter Body Nuts Bolts Process j head section Process head 170 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 9 3 Torque ratings Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms Continued Table 66 lists process head bolt torque ratings for given transmitter type 15 0 Lb Ft 0 8 Lb Ft Table 66 Process Head Bolt Torque Ratings Meter Body Process Head Bolting Type Type Bolting Size Carbo
248. onal and Integral act on ERROR and Derivative acts on PV Type equation where Integral acts on ERROR and Proportional and Derivative act on PV OUT LAG Time constant of single exponential LAG filter applied to the OUT parameter primary output Units in seconds For Ideal PID equation the lag filter is fixed at 1 16 and is not configurable Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 111 8 7 Function Block Continued Table 43 Honeywell PID Parameters continued Parameter Name Description Parameter Contents GAIN NLIN Dimensionless gain factor When the gain factor is multiplied by absolute value of the error and added to the linear GAIN the result is a gain response which is proportional to the deviation Default is zero resulting in no response due to non linear gain action GAIN COMP The composite gain quantity including both linear and non linear gain parameters Read only parameter ERROR ABS Absolute value of the difference between PV and working setpoint Read only parameter WSP Working setpoint This is the setpoint value after absolute and rate limits have been applied Deviation alarms are computed on this value Read only parameter BLOCK TEST An internal Honeywell test parameter See Section 11 7 and 11 8 for more details PID Block Diagram Figure 29 is a block diagram showing the key components of the PID Control function block Figure
249. onfigurator application Use a device tag name up to eight characters that does not contain spaces Configure device s Using fieldbus configuration program create See Subsection 6 5 a function block application as part of the Function Block device configuration and process control Application Process strategy Verify device operation Bring the network on line verify operation tune loops etc Continued on next page 60 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 6 3 Checking Out the Transmitter Continued Changing Device Tags Note that when a device tag is changed using the NI configurator the ST 3000 FF function block schedule is cleared by the configurator application i e the function blocks will not execute and all link objects and VCR s are also cleared by the device essentially clearing the links between input and output parameters The NI configurator screen will still show the previous configuration even though the configuration is no longer loaded into the device that had its device tag changed To restart function block execution and restore the link objects you must download a configuration to the ST 3000 FF using the Download Configuration menu selection July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 61 6 4 Verify Communications with Transmitter Establish Communications with Device Identify the Transmitter At the operator interfa
250. onitor Calculation e Service Life Calculation t ST3000FF XD 4254981 ST3000T1B Values Main XD Menu a 4254981 ST3000TB 46 c x 7 og i 2 sec 005 os f Aao Process Alarms Diagnostics Trends Others Methods present Static Pressure is 0 000 psi maximum Static Pressure was 0 000 psi present meter body Sensor Temperature is 18 45 C maximum meter body Sensor Temperature was 31 75 C minimum meter body Sensor Temperature was 0 01 C Stress Monitor value is 0 000 percent This value represents the percentage of time that the unit has spent in stressful conditions The Service Life value is 0 073 percent This value represents the estimated percentage of the expected lifetime When this value nears 100 percent consideration should be given to replacement of the unit Write Changes Read All 158 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 21 Transducer Block Methods Continued The Two Point Calibration method provides an automated procedure to perform the Two point calibration as outlined in Section 10 3 Calibration Y ST 4616821 XD 4616821 ST30007B SEE Apply Values Main XD Menu z 4616821 ST3000TB 0 Z 46 6o VSE 88 2 as Auto Process Alarms Diagnostics Trends Others Methods Do you wish to begin the Two Point Calibration procedure with the block set to the OOS mode 1 Yes 2 No The tra
251. or Interface 7 59 Overpressure Ratings 27 Power Requirements 26 Power Up Transmitter 57 Procedures Benchcheck wiring 20 Code Download 8 Creating an FBAP file 65 Inspecting and cleaning barrier diaphragms 768 Installing flange adapter 46 Mounting transmitter to bracket 3 Replacing meter body 77 Replacing smart meter and electronics module 72 Setting Write Protect Jumper 67 Wiring the transmitter 54 Zero corrects for transmitters with small absolute or differential pressure spans 35 Process connections 44 Process Sealing 56 257 R Remote seal mounting 40 Replacement Parts 2 8 Recommended Spare Parts 237 Series 100 and Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 amp STD930 C D G H K and L and STD974 223 Series 100 and Series 900 Flange Mounted Meter Body 233 Series 100 and Series 900 LGP Meter Body 237 Series 100 GP and AP Meter Bodies and Series 900 AP Meter Body 228 Series 900 DP Meter Body for Models STD924 amp 930 A B E F and J 226 Series 900 Dual Head GP Meter Bodies 230 Series 900 Flush Mount Meter Body 232 REVISION ARRAY parameter 63 N S Network Management 149 Sealing Liquid 276 NI FBUS Configurator 18 20 58 59 65 196 Sensor serial number 94 Non critical faults 206 Simulation jumper 69 Simulation Mode 216 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 3 Steam Heating 283 Superheated Steam 288 System Management SM 142 T Tempera
252. orresponding limit HI HI LIM HI LO LO LO LIM and is either still past the limit or is in the hysteresis range ALARM HYS is the percentage of OUT SCALE that is used for alarm hysteresis Block alarm Write Auto to MODE BLK parameter of AI block Recalibrate transmitter See Section 10 Recalibrate transmitter See Section 10 Recalibrate transmitter See Section 10 Reduce pressure at sensor Check range and if required replace transmitter with one that has a wider range Meter body may have been damaged Check the transmitter for accuracy and linearity Replace meter body and recalibrate if needed Reduce the value or increase limits Check BLOCK ERR for status bit See Subsection 11 7 for details of BLOCK ERR parameter 206 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 11 6 Critical Fault Summary Non critical Failures Table 83 summarizes the conditions that could cause a critical fault in the ST 3000 FF transmitter along with recommended actions to correct the fault Table 83 Summary of Critical Faults Problem Fault Probable Cause Recommended Action Al block is executing but status of output is status Transducer board generates 1 and 2 Write 4 or sensor failure processor to RESTART 1 Meter body fault parameter of resource 2 Characterization PROM fault block If failure is still present replace meter body 3
253. ost systems may be capable of being tuned during configuration by using the knowledge by which parameters may be accessed in the same view object group At least four view objects Viewl View2 View3 and View4 are defined for each resource block function block and transducer block in a device for a total of 16 views Block parameters can be grouped and displayed depending on how the data is to be used Four standard view objects groups are defined for accessing the following types of information 1 Viewl used to display dynamic operation data 2 View2 used to display static operation data 3 View3 used to display all dynamic data 4 View4 used to display other static data In the ST 3000 FF four view objects are defined for each of the four blocks for a total of 16 view objects Some parameters are accessible in all four views while others are available in one view Tables 52 through 55 list all the parameter objects in the transmitter e Anumber in the View columns of the table indicates the number of view s in which a parameter is visible only if a number is shown in the column for that parameter The number indicates the number of bytes of data which is shown for that parameter in a view The TOTAL line in each table shows the size of each view in bytes July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 123 8 10 View Objects Continued Table 53 View List for Resource Block Pa
254. ousing Block Internal Ground Terminal 5 Screw Terminal Block xxii ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Section 1 ST 3000 FF Description 1 1 Introduction Section Contents About this Section ATTENTION This section includes these topics Section Topic See Page AIntroduction rte yes 1 1 2 CE Conformity 2 1 3 ST 3000 FF 3 14 1 amp tae ntes dun 7 1 5 Transmitter Order sss 10 1 6 Local Meter Option 2 5 5 b ou EH Te eH e 1 This section is intended for users who have never worked with our ST 3000 FF Transmitter It provides some general information to acquaint you with the transmitter For communication configuration and monitoring of the ST 3000 FF transmitter Honeywell offers NI FBUS Configurator software The Configurator runs on a variety of Personal Computer PC platforms using Windows 95 or Windows NT It is a bundled Windows software and PC interface hardware solution that allows quick error free configuration and diagnosis of Honeywell Smartline instruments with FOUNDATION Fieldbus communications The NI FBUS Configurator allows users to communicate with the transmitter from a remote location to Configure
255. ovides the means for you to configure the FBAPs of fieldbus devices This configuration tool allows you to e Connect function block inputs and outputs according to the process requirements e Make changes to function block parameters according to the process requirements e Make changes to the schedule of function block execution e Write the FBAP changes to the device e Save the FBAP file Again all fieldbus devices contain one or more Function Block Application Processes as part of their device configuration Some or all of a device s function blocks may be used as a part of an FBAP Also function blocks from a number of field devices may be connected as part of an FBAP Using a fieldbus configuration application you can create and make changes to a FBAP according to your process application requirements The procedure in Table 22 outlines the tasks for creating a typical FBAP file Table 23 Creating an FBAP file Connect configurator builder to network Load and startup the fieldbus configuration program on the host computer PC or other operator interface Connect fieldbus devices to the network The configurator program will display all active devices iu Create a new FBAP or window Drag appropriate function blocks into the application area Select function blocks to be used and drag them into the function block application graphic area Interconnect function blocks Use the configurator program s tools to connect t
256. ow and pressure measurement applications we may be required to use steam to heat the impulse piping to the flow or pressure transmitter as well as the transmitter itself For these applications we must verify the temperature of the heating steam used As an example assume that steam at 100 psig saturated 338 F 170 C is to be reduced to 30 psig pressure for the heating system Too frequently it is assumed that this pressure reduction will result in steam at 274 F 134 C the temperature of saturated steam at 30 psig Wrong A reduction of the steam pressure will not appreciably decrease the initial steam temperature In our example we were talking about saturated steam in the main header from the boiler But modern industrial boilers cannot afford to let waste heat go up the stack After reaching the boiling point in the drum the steam flows through a series of pipes in the second pass of the flue gas exit extracting additional heat energy and being raised to a temperature higher than the saturation temperature at the same pressure This is superheat and depending on boiler design it may amount to 50 to 300 F 10 to 149 C above the saturated steam temperature It also permits packing more heat energy in a given size pipe for transmission from the process Thus in the typical application the problem of steam heating is compounded by the additional superheat in the main header Specifically when steam is reduced in pressure it retains
257. page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 209 11 7 Device Diagnostics Continued ERROR DETAIL parameter ERROR DETAIL Enumeration Using ERROR DETAIL for Troubleshooting ERROR DETAIL parameter in the resource block contains data that describes the cause of any device critical error This category of error will cause the resource block to remain in O S actual mode regardless of its target mode This in turn causes all other blocks to remain in O S actual mode ERROR DETAIL is an array of three unsigned integers each 16 bits in size The three sub elements are generally defined as follows 1 Error Type 2 Location 3 Sub type Table 86 lists the enumerated values for the Error Type element only The Location and Sub type elements have no significant meaning for users Table86 ERROR DETAIL Parameter Enumeration Interprocessor error startup Interprocessor error operation EEPROM corrupt background diagnostics If there is a critical error in the resource block you should read and record the ERROR DETAIL value Then reset the device Write RESTART parameter Wait 30 seconds after reset and read ERROR DETAIL again to check if error cleared and then Call Honeywell Technical Assistance Center 210 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 11 8 Block Configuration Errors Configuration Errors Block configuration
258. pical start up tasks and places where you can find detailed information about performing the tasks July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 13 2 2 Advanced Diagnostics See table below for Advanced Diagnostic availability in your instrument Use National Instruments or other configurator to obtain revision information from the resource block s REVISION ARRAY DEV REV and DD REV parameters and use that information to pick appropriate revision combination column 1 thru 4 in table below Use designation and notes from the appropriate column to determine level of availability of each Advanced Diagnostic feature The notes at end of the table explain situations where a feature is only partially available Table 1 Advanced Diagnostics Availability Table 1 Advanced Diagnostic Feature Availability by Firmware Hardware Revision Combination Revision Combination 3 1 2 3 4 RS Block REVISION ARRAY 0 gt 0402 below 0501 above 0501 above 0501 above Type RS Block REVISION ARRAY 2 gt 0103 below 0103 below 0104 above 0105 above RS Block DEV REV DD REV gt 08 02 below 09 01 above 09 01 above 09 01 above Advanced Diagnostic Feature y 1 INSTALL_DATE N A F F F F F F Parameter 2 TIME_IN_SERVICE N A F F F F F F Parameter 3
259. plication clock time contained in 265 Dynamic the last clock message TIME PUBLISHER The node address of the device which 267 Dynamic ADDR sent the last clock message MACROCYCLE The length of the macrocycle in 1 32 of a 269 Set by SM mgr during DURATION millisecond ticks address assignment Continued on next page PRIMARY AP TIME The node address of the primary time 266 Set by SM mgr during PUBLISHER publisher for the local link bus address assignment July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 145 8 18 System Management SM Continued Device ID Tag Name Each fieldbus device on the network is uniquely identified by and Device Address Device ID which is set by the manufacturer to identify the device Device Name Tag set by you to identify operation Device Address a unique numerical address on the fieldbus segment Address may be set automatically by system management Automatic Device Assignment of physical device addresses is performed automatically by Address Management system management 1 The sequence for assigning a physical address to a new device is 2 A physical device address is assigned to a new device This may be done off line before the device is installed on the fieldbus network The address can be preconfigured at the factory or set by you 3 The device is connected to the bus and uses default address 248 to 251 If no physical device name is set the
260. presented in Section 8 4 Resource Block Methods are provided by the next three selections whice are Device SW revision RS Block Information and Model selection Information Information provided by these methods follows July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 151 8 20 Resource Block Methods Continued The Device SW Revision Method provides data for the device and DD revision ST 4616821 RS 4616821 RB2 SE Apply Values Main RS Menu RS 4616821 RB2 ES 4 a tE Periodic Updates 2 sec 2 1 005 Auto Process Tuning Options Alarms Diagnostics Others Methods Device Type 0002 Device DD Rev 0901 The Device Description file being used by the host is 0901 Main Fieldbus SW Revision 5011 Fieldbus BOOT SW revision 402 Transducer board SW revision 104 Write Changes Read All 152 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 20 Resource Block Methods Continued The Block Information Method gives information and ability to reset certain parameters e Write Lock jumper e Time in Service converted to years months days hours and minutes e Present Terminal Voltage Minimum Terminal Voltage Present Electronics Temperature Maximum and minimum Electronics Temperature Temperature units are either or F e Number of Power Cycles e Ability to reset the minimum terminal Voltage and associated date e Ability to reset Power Cycle
261. program Also a find tag query service searches for a given function block tag among the fieldbus devices and returns the device address and object dictionary index for that tag 1f found There are two 2 objects that identify the VFD s in the device OD Index VFD REF VFD TAG Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 147 8 18 System Management SM Continued Function Block The SMIB contains a schedule called the Function Block Schedule that Scheduling indicates when that device s function blocks are to be executed System Management schedules the start of each function block relative to the macrocycle of the device The macrocycle represents one complete cycle of the function block schedule in a device The macrocycles of all devices on the link are synchronized so that function block executions and their corresponding data transfers are synchronized in time Using the configurator software the device s function block schedule can be configured Function Block There are four scheduling objects defined in the ST 3000 FF Any Scheduling Objects function block can be configured in one or more scheduling objects By default the first scheduling object is assigned to the AI block and the second is assigned to the PID block Table 63 lists the function block scheduling objects with their object directory index and default values Table 64 Function Block Scheduli
262. r PC running a fieldbus configuration software application There are various applications available for you to configure fieldbus devices The examples presented in this manual refer to the NI FBUS Configurator application For further details on fieldbus configuration solutions see your Honeywell Sales Representative July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 59 6 3 Checking Out the Transmitter Verifying Transmitter Once the transmitter is installed and powered up you then verify communications with it and other field devices on the network Table 20 outlines the steps for identifying and checking out the transmitter on a fieldbus network Table 21 Transmitter Checkout Tasks Verify device location Check that the device is installed in the correct physical location Verify device ID Match the device ID with the physical location The device serial number is the PROM ID which is stamped on the transmitter housing nameplate Verify connection with At the operator interface establish See Subsection 6 4 host computer to device communications with the device on the fieldbus Verifying network Communications with Transmitter Verify or assign device Verify that the device tag and node address See Changing Device tag and address are set If not assign the device tag and the Tags below correct node address The device tag and address can be set and viewed using the fieldbus device c
263. rameter Level Calculation Formula The following parameters are used do the level calculation and these values are derived from your particular application e LEVEL COEFF contains an array of floating point values coefficients to be used in the equation TANK RANGE contains the upper and lower ranges of the tank measurements i e for a full and empty tank and the engineering units The LEVEL COEFF parameter will contain coefficients used in the polynomial level equation These coefficients must generated by you for your application Also these values must be such that the result of the calculation is expressed in percent If the AI block s XD SCALE is not configured with the engineering units in percent value and CHANNEL 2 then a block configuration error will be generated in the AI block and it will remain in Out of Service O S mode The polynomial can also be used for measuring flow Where flow f Ap The TANK RANGE parameter is configured with the upper and lower range values of the pressure coming from the tank measurement This must also take into account the head pressure of any fill fluid in remote seal tubing wet legs The level is calculated in the following way 100 Co C1 C C4 Cs H5 where Volume 96 H height of process tank fluid in fraction 0 0 1 0 of TANK RANGE C LEVEL COEFF i NOTE You must provide the coeff
264. rameters index Name View views View 3 2 13 smv 2 2 2 27 bs AUERTARE s wows 4 if 4 e 1 E orso fwanuraco 1 o ovmv 1 orv 2 35 SCS 6 Resan 7 rwuss Ls remus wages waest 2 _ m wwowsz gt 3 4 _ senmus 7 seror 7 3 CS sersa CS 3 ferese a quscen 7 9 1 1L Lm 1 5 Rokaw 8 5 fackoprion 1 was 4 1 l mer 1 Continued on next page 124 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 10 View Objects Continued Table 52 View List for Resource Block Parameters continued Honeywell Parameters DL CMD1 View1 View2 View3 View4 DL CMD2 Name Viewi V
265. ransmitter Change block parameter MODE BLK ACTUAL Auto At the transmitter verify that the display shows the proper engineering units NOTE Depending on the selected engineering units you may need to attach the appropriate stick on label to the display faceplate Honeywell drawing number 30756918 001 Set the following parameters to values which do not exceed the OUT SCALE EU 100 and EU 0 parameter values HI HI LIM HI LIM LO LO LIM LO LIM For example If OUT SCALE EU 100 400 and 78 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 79 Section 8 Function Block Application Description 8 1 Introduction Section Contents About this Section For More Information on FBAP This section includes these topics Section Topic See Page 8oL IntrOdUction fette ein T 8 2 Function Block Application Process 78 8 3 Block Description S iet decipi he tret 79 8 47 Resource Block iit 82 8 5 Transducer Block reete ree t ese PS 85 8 6 Analog Input Function Block sese 93 8 7 PID Function Block sese 102 8 8 Block Parameter Summary 109 89 Link ObJects ettet eit re Ia 115 8 10 View ODJects comet ies treat ie eti
266. ribes the Honeywell defined parameters in the resource Honeywell defined block which are used during the application download procedure Parameters Table 35 Resource Block Parameter Descriptions Description or Parameter Contents DL CMD1 Used to unlock or access the domain flash memory area of the ST 3000 FF for download Entering a series of values in these two parameters changes the DL CMD2 internal state of the device so that it will accept the downloaded application software The download cannot begin until the device is put into the correct internal state The internal state of the device is read in the DL APPSTATE parameter DL APPSTATE Contains the state of the downloaded ing application DL SIZE Contains the size of the downloaded application This will always be an even number DL CHECKSUM Contains the 16 bit checksum of the downloaded application REVISION ARRAY read only parameter that contains the application firmware revision level for 1 Stack board application 2 Stack board boot code 3 Transducer board application See Section 6 4 also BLOCK TEST An internal Honeywell test parameter See Section 11 7 and 11 8 for more details ERROR DETAIL Contains data indicating the cause of device critical errors Parameter contains three sub elements 1 Error Type 2 Location 3 Sub type Only Error Type element contains information meaningful to users A description of this parameter is found in
267. rictions do apply based on other as built transmitter characteristics and some options are mutually exclusive Table A 4 ST 3000 FF Table III Approval Body Options If Code is Then transmitter option 1C FM approval body certification for Explosionproof Flameproof Class Division 1 Groups A B C D Dust Ignition Proof Class Il Ill Division 1 Groups E Non Incendive Class l Division 2 Groups A B C D Intrinsically Safe Class Il IIl Division 1 Groups C D E F G 2J CSA approval body certification for Explosionproof Class I Division 1 Groups B C D Dust Ignition Proof Class II Division 1 Groups F G Intrinsically Safe Class Il Ill Division 1 Groups C D E F G Non Incendive Class l Division 2 Groups A B C D CA IECEx approval body certification for Flameproof Zone 1 Ex d Intrinsically Safe Zone 0 1 Ex ia SAEx approval body certification for 22 Intrinsically Safe Zone 0 1 Ex ia 7 Flameproof Zone 1 Ex d ZA Intrinsically Safe Zone 0 1 Ex ia Marking Flameproof Zone 1 Ex d IIC ATEX LCIE approval body certification for Intrinsically Safe Zone 0 9II 1 Ex ia II C Intrinsically Safe Zone 1 aa sOExiallC 126 LCIE approval body certification for Dust tight Zone 0 52111 D Ex tD 20 IP6X Flameproof and Dust tight Zone 1 59112 GD Ex d Ex tD A21 6 2
268. ristics wire gauge cable types B C or D e Wiring scheme bus with spurs or trees Number and type of devices are devices bus or self powered and are they suitable for I S applications In any fieldbus segment there may be a variety of cable and the quality of existing cable may vary therefore you should try to use the shortest cable length possible If you are installing intrinsically safe field devices in hazardous areas there are additional things to consider See Intrinsically Safe Applications section Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 51 5 44 Wiring ST 3000 FF Transmitter Continued ST 3000 FF Wire Fieldbus signal communications and DC power are supplied to the Connections transmitter using the same fieldbus twisted pair cable Inside the electronics housing of the transmitter is the terminal block for connecting external wiring as shown in Figure 23 Table 17 explains the usage of the wiring terminals for fieldbus use Each transmitter includes an internal ground terminal to connect the transmitter to earth ground A ground terminal can be optionally added to the outside of the electronics housing While it is not necessary to ground the transmitter for proper operation we suggest that you do so to minimize the possible effects of noise on the output signal and provide additional protection against lightning and static discharge da
269. rst Unpolled Node Number of Unpolled Nodes Measure the DC voltage at the device s SIGNAL terminals Voltage must be within the limits as shown in Table 5 Check for proper voltage polarity to the device e Fieldbus wire to SIGNAL e Fieldbus wire to SIGNAL Measure DC current to device It should be between 17 and 20 mA Check to see that only two terminators are present on link Measure the peak to peak signal amplitude it should be e Output 0 75 to 1 0 Vp p e Input 0 15 to 1 0 Vp p Measure the signal on the and SIGNAL terminals and at a frequency of 31 25k Hz Recommended Action Set Number of Unpolled Nodes to 0 If no voltage or voltage is out of operating limits determine cause and correct Correct the wiring to device terminals if necessary If current is insufficient determine cause and correct Correct if necessary If signal amplitude is insufficient determine the cause and correct Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 197 11 3 Device Troubleshooting Continued Incorrect or Non If you are using non compatible versions of fieldbus software tools Compatible Tools such as Standard Dictionary or Device Description DD files or if you are using the incorrect revision level of device firmware then device objects or some block objects may not be visible or identified by name See Table 78 for possible
270. ry tubing 2 If Transmitter Model Then Connect Remote Number is Seal on STR93D or STR12D high pressure HP side of transmitter to lower flange mounting on tank wall for variable head H1 STR13D low pressure LP side of transmitter to lower flange mounting on tank wall for variable head H1 1 On insulated tanks remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension Continued on next page 40 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 5 2 Mounting ST 3000 Transmitter Continued Remote seal Table 10 Mounting Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Continued mounting continued Step Action 3 If Transmitter Model Then Connect Remote Number is Seal on STR93D or STR12D low pressure LP side of transmitter to upper flange mounting on tank wall for fixed or constant head H2 STR13D high pressure HP side of transmitter to upper flange mounting on tank wall for fixed or constant head H2 1 On insulated tanks remove enough insulation to accommodate the flange extension 4 It is the End User s responsibility to provide a flange gasket and mounting hardware that are suitable for the transmitter s service condition Figure 17 Typical Remote Diaphragm Seal Transmitter Installation LP Side Model STR93D Model STR12D HP Side Model STR13D Maximum Level H2 Fixed Variable Ref Le
271. s Table 7 NOTE Table 6 lists Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP for a given transmitter Upper Range Limit URL The maximum allowable working pressure MAWP is the pressure used for the approval body safety calculations Transmitter Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP Ratings Transmitter Type Upper Range Limit URL MAWP Draft Range 10 inches 20 25 mbar 50 psi 3 5 bar Differential Pressure 400 inches H20 1 bar 3 000 psi 210 bar 100 psi 7 bar 3 000 psi 210 bar 3 000 psi 210 bar 3 000 psi 210 bar Gauge Pressure 100 psi 7 bar 100 psi 7 bar 300 psi 21 bar 300 psi 21 bar 500 psi 35 bar 500 psi 35 bar 3 000 psi 210 bar 3 000 psi 210 bar 6 000 psi 415 bar 6 000 psi 415 bar 10 000 psi 690 bar 10 000 psi 690 bar Flange Mount 400 inches 2 1 bar 100 psi 7 bar Per selected flange and material ANSI ASME 150 300 DN 40 Remote Seal 400 inches 2 1 bar 100 psi 7 bar Lesser MAWP of either Remote Seal selected or transmitter pressure rating Absolute Pressure 780 mmHg Absolute 1 bar 780 mmHg Absolute 1 bar 500 psia 35 bar 500 psia 35 bar 3 000 psia 210 barA 3 000 psia 210 barA Maximum Allowable Working Pressure MAWP may vary with materials of construction and process temperature For more
272. s and associated date Apply Values Main RS Menu 5 4254981 RB2 49 23 PES Updates 2 ES 005 Auto Process Tuning Options Alarms Diagnostics Others Methods Write Lock is not locked changes to parameters are permitted The following RS Block Data was collected Time in service 3 years 0 months 0 days 2 hours and 9 minutes Present terminal voltage is 24 8930 Voltage minimum was 18 7010 Present electronics temperature is 28 1720 Maximum electronics temperature was 30 4400 Minimum electronics temperature was 22 1240 Temperature units are consistent with the selection of the XD Block Tenperature Sensor Units Temperature Units are in degrees C if Temperature Sensor Units are either degerees K or C or degrees F if Temperature Sensor Units are either degerees F or R Do you wish to reset the Voltage minimum and associated Date 1 Yes 2 No Voltage minimum and associated Date are unchanged There have been 4 Power Cycles Do you wish to reset the Power Cycles Counter Value and associated Date Write Changes Read All July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 153 8 20 Resource Block Methods Continued The Model Selection Information provides data for the Model selection Number Key Number and Meter Body type and Flange Assembly Selection is shown below ST 4616821 RS 4616821 RB2 SEE Apply Values RS 4616821 Proce
273. s on BLOCK ERR Look in BLOCK ERR of all blocks in device for message STATUS Bad sensor failure Critical See Table 83 Summary of Critical Faults Look in AI BLOCK ERR for message See Subsection Bad device failure Critical 11 7 for details on BLOCK_ERR Look in BLOCK_ERR of all blocks in device for message See Table 83 Summary of Critical Faults Good constant See Table 82 Summary of Non Non critical critical Faults Uncertain ALIL ALARM SUM Look in BLOCK ERR of all blocks CURRENT Block alarm Critical in the device See Subsection 11 7 Non critical for details on BLOCK ERR Process alarm Non critical See Table 82 Summary of Non critical Faults Depending on the fieldbus interface application device operating status and parameter values may appear as text messages The text in the table is typical of values or messages seen when using the NI FBUS configurator 204 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 11 4 Transmitter Faults Continued Table 81 Identifying Critical and Non critical Device Faults continued Block Parameter Value or Fault Type Message Bit number All Blocks Block Configuration Non critical Check the value of all Error 1 configurable parameters in the BLOCK_ERR block and correct if necessary See Subsection 11 9 Clearing Block Configuration Errors See Table 85 for description Set simulate jump
274. s or status and then interpreting their meaning using the tables in this section Pl Additional diagnostics may be available through supervisory and control applications that monitor and control fieldbus networks These diagnostics and messages are dependent upon the capabilities of the application and control system you are using Troubleshooting with The diagnostic messages generated by the ST 3000 FF transmitter and the NI FBUS block parameters can be accessed and evaluated using the NI FBUS Contguration Taol Configurator Troubleshooting of some transmitter faults and corrective actions also can be performed using the configurator 196 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 11 3 Device Troubleshooting Device Not Visible on Network If you cannot see a device on the fieldbus network the device may not be powered up or possibly the supervisory or control program is not looking for or polling the node address of that device See Table 77 for possible causes and recommended actions Table 77 Device Troubleshooting Table A Device not Visible on Network y Device may have a node address that is within the unpolled range of addresses No power to the device Incorrect polarity at device terminals Insufficient current to device More than two or less than two terminators wired to fieldbus link Insufficient signal to device Look at the following settings e Fi
275. sing and electronics design This manual only applies for ST 3000 Series 100 and 900 transmitters with FOUNDATION Fieldbus option FF Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 5 1 3 513000 FF Transmitters Continued ST 3000 Pressure Figure 3 illustrates the present ST 3000 FF pressure transmitter family Transmitter Models tree Figure 3 ST 3000 FF Pressure Transmitter Family Tree ST 3000 FF Transmitter Series 100 Gauge and Differential ute Gauge and Pressure Temperature Absolute Flange Mount 81147 Pressure Pressure Liquid Level STD1xx i 9 9 Differential Pressure STGIXL STGIm STF box with Flange on One STA 1xL STA for Side STF1xx Series 900 Differential Pressure with Remote Diaphragm Seals STR xx Gauge and Differential Dual H ead Absolute Pressure Gauge Pressure STD9XX Differential Pressure Pressure STG9xL with Flange on One STG9xx STA9xL Side STF9xx Gauge and Absolute Pressure Flange Mount STG9xx Liquid Level STAD STF9 Mount STG9xP These models also available with remote diaphragm seals Differential Pressure with Remote Diaphragm Seals STROKx 24096 Transmitter The ST 3000 FF equipped with a local smart meter allows you to perform Adjustments a Zero correction using the meter pushbuttons A PC running a fieldbus configuration software appl
276. specific information refer to the appropriate Specification and Model Selection Guide or transmitter nameplate NOTE To convert bar values to kilopascals kPa multiply by 100 For example 3 5 bar equals 350 kPa July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 27 4 3 Considerations for Local Meter Option Reference Specifications Table 7 lists pertinent local meter specifications for reference Table 8 Local Meter Specifications Operating Conditions Parameter Ambient Temperature Rated Extreme Transportation and Storage 40 to 176 F 58 to 194 F 40 to 80 50 to 90 Relative Humidity RH 10 to 90 0 to 100 No error Reproduces transmitter signal exactly within its resolution Display Resolution Display Update Rate Meter Display at High and Low Temperature Extremes Shown as 0 005 for 219 99 reading range 19 99 0 05 for 2199 9 reading range 199 9 20 5 for 1999 reading range 1999 5 for 19990 reading range 19 99 K 50 for 199900 reading range 199 9 K 500 for 1999000 reading range 1999 K 50000 for 19990000 reading range 19990 K Above 32 F 0 C 72 second or below 32 0 1 seconds The rated temperature limits for the local meter are listed above and are true in that no damage to the meter will occur over these temperatures however the readability of the LCD is affected if taken to these temperature extremes
277. ss 93 Options Periodic Alarms 005 Aut Diagnostics Advanced Diagnostics Process Ty Others Others Methods Device SW Revision RS Block Information Model Selection Information gt Model Number Key Number and Mete MSG KEY NUMBER STF924 Flange Assembly Parameter MSG_METER_BODY MSG_FLANGE 091 0 MSG_OPTIONS_1 12345678901 2345678901 23451 MSG_OPTIONS 2 997654321 0987654321 098765 v lt B 154 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 20 Resource Block Methods Continued Model Number data 51 4616821 RS 4616821 RB2 Apply Values Main RS Menu a 4616821 RB2 P Eos fq Auto Process Tuning Options Alarms Diagnostics Others Methods STF324 1 091 0 12 34 56 78 90 12 34 56 78 90 12 34 56 78 90 98 76 54 32 10 98 76 54 32 10 98 76 54 32 10 XXXX Write Changes Read All Key Number and Meter Body Data ST 4616821 RS 4616821 RB2 Apply Values Main RS Menu 1 821 mea Li P 46 a fg 23 005 Process Tuning Options Alarms Diagnostics Others Methods ST3000 Model 5 924 Series 900 Flange Mount Liquid Level Model 0 to 400 inH20 Meter Body 1 Flush mount type Reference Head Carbon Steel Vent Drain 316 SS Barrier Diaphragm 3161 SS Diaphragm Plate wetted 3161 SS Fill Fluid Silicone DC 200 Process
278. ssible Solutions Methods Continued Steam heating continued Figure C 9 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Steam Heating 1 4 OD steam tracer line Steam Supply low pressure Pipe insulated with waterproof outer cover Shut off valve 46 Steam heat Impulse piping with tracer line 1 4 thick insulation Pipe strap about 12 valve every 15 Detail of Transmitter Impulse Piping Shut off valve Union or coupling Process pressure transmitter Steam trap or condensate temperature 4 Insulated enclosure 6 return from steam trap All steam and condensate lines must always slope downward at least 1 per foot to prevent low spots which will trap condensate All condensate lines must be protected from freezing Superheated steam considerations We must remember that the temperature of steam is 212 F 100 C only at the normal atmospheric pressure of about 14 7 pounds per square inch absolute psia If the pressure of steam is increased above 14 7 psia the temperature of the steam 18 also increased For example if we have steam at 30 pounds per square inch gage psig the steam temperature is 274 F 134 C Continued on next page 288 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 C 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Superheated steam considerations continued On industrial fl
279. te 3 Note 3 F F Parameter 43 SERVICE LIFE N A Note 4 Note 4 F F Parameter 44 CALIB DATE LAST 2PT N A F F F F F F Parameter 45 CALIB DATE PREV 2PT N A F F F F F F Parameter 46 CALIB DATE RESTORE N A F F F F F F Parameter 47 CALIB DATE CLEAR N A F F F F F F Parameter 48 CALIB DATE ZERO N A F F F F F F Parameter 49 XD Block Information N A F F F F F F Method 50 Two point Calibration N A F F F F F F Method 51 Restore Calibration N A F F F F F F Method 52 Clear Calibration N A F F F F F F Method 53 Calibration Zero N A F F F F F F Method N A Not Available F F Feature has full functionality Note 2 Model number not available data is blank Note 3 Feature is functional but missing effect of electronics temperature Note 4 Service life calculated as if electronics temperature was constant at 0 C Note 5 Future Feature to be added for DP meter body types static pressure is 0 0 for AP and GP type meter bodies Note 6 Feature is not functional The displayed value is fixed at value indicated in table July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 15 2 3 Installation Components Components Needed ST 3000 FF transmitter contains electronics that enable it to operate using the Fieldbus FOUNDATION protocol This digital interface requires a number of components to provide control and data communications between field devices and the control room environment Ta
280. te Conditions The ST 3000 FF transmitter is designed to operate in common indoor industrial environments as well as outdoors To assure optimum performance evaluate these conditions at the mounting area relative to published transmitter specifications and accepted installation practices for electronic pressure transmitters Environmental conditions Ambient temperature Relative humidity Potential noise sources Radio Frequency Interference RFI Electromagnetic Interference EMI Vibration sources Pumps Motorized valves Valve cavitation Process characteristics Temperature Maximum pressure rating Figure 11 illustrates typical mounting area considerations to make before installing a transmitter Figure 11 Typical Mounting Area Considerations Prior to Installation Lightning EMI Relative Humidity Ambient Temperature Large Fan Motors Transceivers RFI po Pump Meter Body vibration Temperature 21003 Continued on next page 24 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 4 2 Considerations for ST 3000 FF Transmitter Continued Temperature limits Table 4 lists the operating temperature limits for the various types of transmitters with silicone fill fluids See transmitter specifications for the temperature limits of transmitters with alternative fill fluids Table 5 Operating Temperature Limits Transmitters with Silicone Fil
281. ters Initial Value Valid Range Corrective Action ALERT KEY non zero Initial Value is a configuration error Set value to non zero number SIMULATE 1 disabled 1 2 disabled enabled Set value in valid range XD SCALE 010 100 inches EU 100 EU 0 Set values to valid range s of water UNITS INDEX matches output of transducer block OUT SCALE 0 to 100 inches EU 100 EU O Set values to valid range of water CHANNEL 1 2 Initial Value is a configuration error Set value to valid range L TYPE 0 1 2 3 Initial Value is a configuration error Uninitialized direct indirect sq Set value to valid range root FTIME o 0 200 Set value to valid range ALARM HYS 0 5 96 0 50 96 Set value to valid range HI HI PRI 0 15 Set value to valid range HI PRI LO LO PRI LO PRI HI HI LIM INF INF or within Set value to valid range HI LIM OUT SCALE range LO LIM INF INF or within Set value to valid range LO LO LIM OUT SCALE range 214 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 11 9 Clearing Block Configuration Errors Continued Table 89 PID Function Block Parameters BYPASS 1 OFF 2 ON Initial value is a configuration error a mensem SHED OPT 1 8 see Shed Options nitial value is a configuration error HI HI LIM INF PV SCALE INF Values must be set in rank order HI LIM e g LO LIM LO LO LIM but lt HI LIM etc LO LIM INF PV SCALE INF Values must be set in rank ord
282. ters Continued Series Model Number Data ATTENTION Honeywell s line of Smart ST 3000 FF Transmitters includes the Series 100 and Series 900 with several models to meet various process pressure measurement and interface requirements Each transmitter comes with a nameplate that lists its given model number The model number format consists of a Key Number with several Table selections as shown below 56 3 2 S amp SS ee gt AS ON S 2 S SS 4 q cR lt Key Number Table Il Table III Table IV SHELA EMA 01101010 818 EB FIR x x x x You can quickly identify what series and basic type of transmitter you have from the third and fourth digits in the key number The letter in the third digit represents one of these basic transmitter types A Absolute Pressure D Differential Pressure F Flange Mounted G Gauge Pressure Remote Seals The number in the fourth digit matches the first digit in the transmitter Series Thus a 1 means the transmitter is a Series 100 Refer to the Model Selection Guide for a complete description of the model number for your transmitter Previous versions of the ST 3000 transmitter with designations of Series 100 Series 100e Series 600 and Series 900 have been supplied at various times since the ST 3000 was introduced in 1983 While all these transmitters are functionally alike there are differences in hou
283. the transmitter by selecting and setting operating parameters Request and display transmitter data Access diagnostic information to identify configuration communication transmitter or process problems e Calibrate transmitter NI FBUS Configurator version 2 3 is compatible with our latest ST 3000 FF transmitters Refer to Honeywell ST 3000 FF Fieldbus Pressure Transmitter Software Release Guide for additional information on NI FBUS Configurator compatibility or contact your Honeywell representative for more information July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 1 1 2 CE Conformity CE Conformity This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of Europe 2004 108 EC the EMC Directive Conformity of this product with any other CE Mark Directive s shall not be assumed Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual and the following special conditions may invalidate this product s conformity with the EMC Directive CE Conformity Shielded twisted pair cables are required for I O interface circuits Special Conditions Europe ATTENTION The emission limits of EN 50081 2 are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio
284. therefore you may choose the Upper Trim Points trim point values which calibrate the transmitter e The lower trim point be zero or a user selected value for the lower range value e The upper trim point can be a user selected value for the upper range value Trim Point Limits Table 71 lists the low and high limit trim point limits for various transmitter types Table 71 Low and High Trim Point Limits for ST 3000 FF Transmitters Device Low Limit High Limit Type Negative of high 200 of URL or maximum overpressure limit rating SENSOR MAX OVP whichever is less 15 inches of water 15096 of URL Precision Pressure You must have a precision pressure source with an accuracy of 0 0496 Source or better to do a range calibration Note that Honeywell factory calibrates the ST 3000 FF with inches of water ranges using inches of water pressure referenced to a temperature of 39 2 4 Two Point and Use the procedure in Table 72 to perform a two point sensor calibration Turndown Calibration and turndown calibration using lower and upper trim points Procedure NOTE When calibrating both lower and upper trim points calibrate the lower trim point first Continued on next page 188 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 10 3 Calibration Continued Two Point and Turndown Calibration Procedure continued Table 72 Two Point Sensor Calibration Procedure Using a fiel
285. tion 10 Calibration transmitter OUT parameter value no and sch No function blocks are executing because they are not alternate on in the current FB schedule display Flashes Only PID block is executing in the FB schedule No value displayed EN Alternates with Al block or Transducer block is in Out of Service mode July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 77 7 5 Changing Local Meter Display Changing Output The local meter display can be changed to display output in user Display selected engineering units Table 30 lists the steps to select the engineering units for your process application A block diagram of the AI block is shown in Figure 28 in Section 8 6 which may aid in performing the procedure Table 31 Changing Local Meter Display Units At the operator station access the device tag of the transmitter Set the AI block MODE BLK parameter to O S Out Of Service Set the OUT SCALE UNITS INDEX to the desired engineering unit to be shown on the meter display Set parameters OUT SCALE EU 100 and OUT SCALE EU 0 to a range for the unit selected in step 3 Set parameter L TYPE to INDIRECT This allows the OUT SCALE parameter values to be shown on the meter display Also setting L TYPE to INDIRECT SQRT allows you select flow units for display OUT SCALE EU 0 0 Then HI LIM and HI LIM must be lt 400 and LO LO LIM and LO LIM must be gt 0 Write the changes to the t
286. tion and Device Reference Guide July 2011 Appendix C Freeze Protection of Transmitters C 1 Possible Solutions Methods Problem When water is present in the process fluid and ambient temperatures can fall below the freezing point 32 F 0 C pressure transmitters and their piping require freeze protection Transmitters may also require continuous heating if the process fluid 15 tar wax or other medium that will solidify at normal ambient However uncontrolled steam or electric heating in addition to wasting energy can cause errors and accidentally destroy the transmitter Solution These two basic solutions are possible Eliminate the need for heating the transmitter by keeping the freezable process fluid out of direct contact with transmitter Control the steam or electric heat to prevent overheating on warm days while protecting against freeze ups under the coldest conditions The other paragraphs in this section review a number of methods for implementing both solutions Sealing liquid method The simplest and least costly method is to use a sealing liquid in the transmitter meter body and its impulse piping to the process The small contact interface area between the sealing liquid and the process fluid reduces the mixing of the two fluids You should select a sealing liquid that has a greater specific gravity than the process fluid to inhibit mixing It also must have freezing and boiling temperatures compatibl
287. to the housing and assemble transmitter by reversing the steps in this procedure Changes to jumper position are recognized upon power up Figure 24 Write Protect Jumper Location on Transducer Board Simulation Jumper Power Connector Meter Flex Tape 2 Connector Write Protect Jumper Table 25 Write Protect Jumper Settings To Set the Jumper to Enable read and write access to the W position on the R transmitter s configuration Transducer board g Enable read only Write Protect R position on the wR access to transmitter s configuration Transducer board 2 Factory set default FEATURE SEL parameter must also be set accordingly to enable write protect Continued on next page 68 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 6 6 Setting Write Protect Feature Continued Enabling Write The Write Protect Feature is enabled when two conditions are met 1 Protect Feature the Jumper is set to the R Position at power up and 2 the HARD W LOCK is set to 1 yes Operations required to meet the two conditions can be performed in any order For a complete summary of the combinations for Jumper Settings and HARD W LOCK Settings and resulting enabled or disabled condition for Write Protect refer to Table 26 Write Protect Truth Table Note that once the transmitter is write protected the hardware jumper must be
288. tored to original factory settings or even cleared so that the transmitter will operate using sensor characterization values The NI_FBUS Configurator application can be used to perform the calibration procedures The software application is not a calibrated measurement source It is a digital diagnostic tool that provides verification of device parameter values In general calibration procedures follow this process 1 Prepare the transmitter 2 Write the appropriate parameters 3 Write to CAL CMD 4 The results of the calibration procedure are read from the CAL SOURCE and CAL STATUS block parameters The calibration parameter values and calibration commands are written to and read from the transmitter using a fieldbus configuration application such as the NI FBUS Configurator 184 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 10 3 Calibration Select Calibration You can select the calibration source to be used by the transmitter during operation Calibration Type For Procedure See Table Two point calibration Calibrates the transmitter range using the two point procedure This procedure is also used to calibrate the transmitter to operate at a range that is smaller than its full range Turndown calibration Restore to factory calibration Sets the transmitter to operate using the calibration values set at the factory The factory calibration is stored in non volatile memory in t
289. ttach the transmitter to the mounting bracket but do not completely tighten the mounting bolts 2 Connect a tube between the input connections in the high pressure HP and low pressure LP heads to eliminate the affects of any surrounding air currents 3 Connect an operator interface and transmitter to a fieldbus link and power up the link to read the transmitter s output See figure J Junction Block Terminator Power Conditioner May be contained in power supply Differential Pressure Type Transmitter Fieldbus Network Interface A 4 Establish communications with the transmitter Follow the steps in Table 3 if needed 5 While reading the transmitter s output Al block OUT parameter position the transmitter so the output reading is zero and completely tighten the mounting bolts Tube 6 Perform an input zero correct function to correct for any minor error that may occur after the mounting bolts are tightened See Calibration Section 10 for zero correction procedure 7 Remove the tube from between the input connections and the power to the fieldbus link 8 Continue with the remaining installation tasks Continued on next page 36 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 5 2 Mou
290. ture limits operating 25 Transmitter communications 59 description 3 status and fault identification 204 Transmitter location 43 Transmitter Mounting 37 Transmitter options reference 260 Transmitter Startup 58 Trend Objects 133 Trim Points 188 Troubleshooting 195 Two Point Calibration 188 VCRs 150 Voltage Resistance and Current 51 W Wiring Diagrams 238 Write Protect Feature 67 Z Zero Corrects Procedure 35 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide Sales Service For application assistance current specifications pricing or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor contact one of the offices below New Zealand Honeywell Limited Phone 64 9 623 5050 Fax 64 9 623 5060 Toll Free 0800 202 088 Asia Pacific Global Technical Support Field Instruments Phone 65 6580 3156 Fax 65 6445 3033 Singapore Honeywell Pte Ltd Phone 65 6580 3278 Fax 65 6445 3033 Australia Honeywell Limited Phone 61 7 3846 1255 FAX 61 7 3840 6481 Toll Free 1300 36 39 36 Toll Free Fax 1300 36 04 70 South Korea Honeywell Korea Co Ltd Phone 822 799 6114 Fax 822 792 9015 China PRC Beijing Honeywell China Inc Phone 86 10 8458 3280 Fax 86 10 8458 4650 Thailand Honeywell Systems Thailand Ltd Phone 662 693 3099 FAX 662 693 3089 China PRC Shanghai 662 Honeywell China Inc Phone 86 21 5257 456
291. typical differential pressure model transmitter Figure 1 Typical ST 3000 FF Differential Pressure Transmitter Electronics Housing Meter Body Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 3 1 3 513000 FF Transmitters Continued About the Transmitter ST 3000 transmits its output in a digital fieldbus protocol format for direct digital communications with control systems continued Figure 2 The Process Variable PV is available for monitoring and control purposes maximum update rate for PV is 8 times per second The meter body temperature is also available as a secondary variable for monitoring purposes only through the operator interface Figure 2 shows a block diagram of the ST 3000 FF operating functions Functional Block Diagram of ST 3000 FF Transmitter Operation Meter Body DP or AP Sensor Temperature Sensor Multiplexer Static Pressure Sensor Factory Configuration Characterization Data Electronics Housing EEPROM Microprocessor Microprocessor Digital 1 0 Bw Broadcasts MAU _ Pressure Transducer Board Stack Board digital signal for 31 25 kbit s Fieldbus Terminal Block Continued on next page ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 1 3 513000 FF Transmit
292. ucer block PRIMARY VALUE Alin Manual Mode When the AI block is in manual mode OUT can be written as a fixed value between 10 and 110 of the OUT SCALE range OUT values between 0 and 100 will show a status of Good OUT values outside the range will show a status of Uncertain The limited field will be marked as Constant for all values PV shows the live pressure signal in manual mode Alin Auto Mode L TYPE determines whether the signal is taken directly from the transducer block and passed to the AI block output L TYPE Direct or converted into different units before it is passed to the AI block output L TYPE Indirect or Ind Sqr Root OUT SCALE determines the units conversion of the signal presented to the output e WhenL TYPE equals Direct OUT is the same as the value passed from the transducer block e WhenL TYPE equals Indirect the PRIMARY VALUE is converted to percent of XD SCALE and that value 15 set equal to percent of OUT FIELD VAL 96 The OUT in is re ranged to a value using the OUT SCALE Continued on next page 106 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 8 6 Analog Input Function Block Continued OUT Status Local Meter Display The following table provides the resulting status of AI block OUT for a given status of PRIMARY VALUE in the transducer block PRIMARY VALUE status OUT value is tested against OUT SCALE Good alarm status Not Limited
293. ue and clean if necessary NOTE If diaphragm is dented has distorted convolutions or radial wrinkles performance may be affected Contact TAC for assistance Continued on next page 168 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 9 3 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms Continued Procedure continued Table 65 Inspecting and Cleaning Barrier Diaphragms Continued Step Action 5 Replace O ring a We recommend that you install a new O ring whenever a process head is removed for cleaning The process head for a GP or AP transmitter with single head design has two O ring grooves A large one which is 2 in 50 8 mm in diameter and a small one which is 1 3 in 33 mm in diameter as shown in the following illustration For high pressure applications be sure to use a small O ring in the smaller inner groove On other models of GP or AP transmitters use a large O ring in the larger outer groove Never use both O rings together L BN 22518 Larger O ring Smaller O ring groove for groove for lower pressure high pressure applications applications lt GP AP Process Head For process heads of a GP or AP transmitter with dual head design see detail illustration for differential pressure transmitters in Figure 30 Coat threads on process head bolts with anti seize compound such as Neverseize or equivalent Replace pr
294. unt of Occurrence 34 TEMP OVER RNG DATE 01 01 72 00 00 00 Captured Date of Occurence 35 TEMP UNDER RNG CTR 0 Count of Occurrence 36 TEMP UNDER RNG DATE 01 01 72 00 00 00 Captured Date of Occurrence 37 TEMP MAX 22 9830 Captured Max Value 268 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 38 TEMP MIN 18 4551 Captured Min Value 39 ST PR 23 3601 Present Value 40 ST PR MAX 25 8348 Max Value 41 ST PR OVER RNG CTR 0 Count of Occurrence 42 ST PR OVER RNG DATE 01 01 72 00 00 00 Captured Date of Occurence 43 STRESS MONITOR 0 44 SERVICE LIFE Constantly Increases 45 CALIB DATE LAST 2PT 01 01 72 00 00 00 Captured Date of Occurrence 46 CALIB DATE PREV 2PT 01 01 72 00 00 00 Captured Date of Occurrence 47 CALIB DATE RESTORE 01 01 72 00 00 00 Captured Date of Occurrence 48 CALIB DATE CLEAR 01 01 72 00 00 00 Captured Date of Occurrence 49 CALIB DATE ZERO 01 01 72 00 00 00 Captured Date of Occurrence Please read CAUTION about these parameters on page 88 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 269 ST 4000636 Al 4000636 8 Device tag Block tagname Analog Input block Page 4000636 Al Block tagname Analog Input block 0 BLOCK INFO Index Parameter mnemonic Value BLOCK 4000636 DD MEMBER 0x00000000 DD ITEM 0x800201d0 DD REVIS
295. ure sensor 1 2 3 valve manifold Temperature standard type controller Differential pressure thermostat transmitter 4 4 insulated enclosure Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 283 C 1 Possible Solutions Methods Continued Electric heating continued Figure C 7 Piping Installation for Process Pressure Transmitter and Impulse Piping with Electric Heating Control Shut off valve Shut off valve Electric heating Union or coupling cable Process pressure transmitter amp insulated enclosure Temperature controller thermostat Temperature sensor Steam heating Steam heating is perhaps the most common yet potentially the most damaging method of protecting transmitters from freeze ups Since steam is generated for use in the overall process operation it is considered an available by product The most important point to remember when steam heating transmitter meter bodies is the temperature of the steam that will be used and its pressure We recommend that you review the next paragraph Superheated steam considerations to get a better understanding of the temperature problem with steam heating In brief do not assume that 30 psig steam is 274 F 134 C and cannot damage a transmitter rated for 250 F 121 C With steam heating as with electrical you should use insulated transmitter body housing
296. urement as the SENSOR TEMP parameter of the transducer block but may be converted to different engineering units before being placed in AUX VARI The parameter SENSOR TEMP UNIT in the transducer block contains the user defined unit value that will be shown in AUX VARI Al Block Parameter Table 37 lists the block parameters and default values for the AI List function block Table 38 AI Function Block Parameter List ST REV Unsigned16 1 2 TAG DESC Octet string STRATEGY Unsigned16 ALERT KEY Unsigned8 SIMULATE Simulate float XD SCALE Scaling units 1147 decimal places 0 OUT SCALE Scaling units 1147 IO OPTS Bit string Value and Status float STATUS OPTS Bit string BLOCK ERR Bit string V Value and Status float U S eme Floating pont O S Out of Service 3 4 5 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 101 8 6 Analog Input Function Block Continued Table 37 AI Function Block Parameter List continued ACK OPTION Bit string Ss 1 42 42 5 Uwe o EE i ng poi 2 2 2 2 2 6 7 8 9 um sr Axvam _ 9 Brock est umm Joj 39 MAXIMUM PV N 40 N Al
297. vice the NI FBUS Configurator will automatically assign a default tag name This is done so that the devices are visible on the network You can then change tag names according to your process requirements Use a block tag name up to eight characters that does not contain spaces The ST 3000 FF may contain default tag names which consist of the following form Block Type first seven digits of the device PROM ID for example Al 1234567 or AI DEF1234 July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 63 6 5 Function Block Application Process Function Block Application Process Default FBAP Configuration Device Configuration Device Configuration Example fieldbus devices contain one or more Function Block Application Processes FBAP as part of their device configuration The Function Block Application Process in the ST 3000 FF is a software application that defines the particular characteristics of the transmitter The FBAP comprises function blocks a transducer block and a resource block plus other functions which support these blocks Each function block contains a set of operating parameters some of which are user configurable that define the operating characteristics of the transmitter Function blocks perform or execute their specific functions according to a schedule This schedule provides the sequence and timing of events which occur within a device and also between other fieldbus devi
298. ware NOTE The numbers when viewed as hexadecimal numbers are in the format MMmm Where MM is the major revision number and mm is the minor revision number Continued on next page 198 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 11 3 Device Troubleshooting Continued Non Functioning Device block objects may not be running executing their function block Blocks schedules or the blocks may be in Out of Service O S mode For example if the AI function block is in O S mode the block will not provide updated output values although the AI block may be running When troubleshooting non functioning block objects start with the resource block For example if the resource block is in O S mode all other blocks in the device will also be in O S mode See Table 79 for possible causes and recommended actions Table 79 Device Troubleshooting Table C e Device output is not updating y Things to check Recommended Action Resource block mode is OOS Read MODE_BLOCK ACTUAL of If necessary Set Resource block MODE_BLOCK TARGET to Auto 1 Resource block is not Read the first element of If 2 element of BLOCK TEST is running BLOCK TEST Number should nonzero write all zeroes to be increasing indicating that element block is running If block is not running check the 27 element of BLOCK TEST Check BLOCK ERR for other See Subsection 11 7 for details errors on BLOCK ERR If an error
299. well CA Phone 58 2 238 0211 FAX 58 2 238 3391 Honeywell Honeywell Process Solutions Honeywell 512 Virginia drive Fort Washington PA 19034 www honeywell com ps 34 ST 25 15 July 2011 2011 Honeywell International Inc
300. with 316 st steel bolts K1 Bolt hex head 7 16 20 UNF 1 375 inches lg 2 K2 Flange adapter 1 K3 Gasket 1 K5 30757503 001 Housing seal kit 1 Continued on next page 234 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide July 2011 12 4 Replacement Parts Continued Figure 43 High Temperature Meter Body 1 1 Sanitary Seal Small Flange NPT Table 102 Parts Identification for Callouts in Figure 43 Key Part Number Description Quantity No Per Unit 1 Specify complete model number from nameplate plus R300 Series 100 replacement meter body 1 Sanitary Seal Head and Gasket 51204982 001 Sanitary Seal Head GP I Stainless Steel Head w st stl hardware 51204982 003 Sanitary Seal Head GP I Stainless Steel Head w SS NACE Hardware 51204982 002 Sanitary Seal Head GP I Hastelloy Head w st stl hardware 51204984 001 Gasket GP I includes Teflon gasket and Viton O ring Flange Adapter Not Shown 51204983 001 Flange adapter kit 72 NPT st stl 150 w st stl bolts 51204983 002 Flange adapter kit 72 st stl 150 w st stl bolts w vent drain 51204983 017 Flange adapter kit gt NPT st stl 1502 w SS NACE bolts 51204983 018 Flange adapter kit gt NPT st stl 150 w SS NACE bolts w vent drain 51204983 003 Flange adapter kit gt NPT Hastelloy 150 w st stl bolts
301. x displays that the download is complete CO NM Verify the values of DL SIZE and DL CHECKSUM in the message box with those in the release guide accompanying the code software e f both values match you can choose to ACTIVATE the new software e f either result does not match DO NOT ACTIVATE and select CANCEL You can either retry the download or contact Honeywell Technical Assistance Center If you choose to activate the software the transmitter will reset and after about 2 minutes reappear on the network Once the download is complete the transmitter will contain a default database You must then download the FBAP configuration saved in step 1 to the transmitter Continued on next page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 181 9 6 Code Download Continued The Effects of a Code effects on a device as a result of the download are that all uisa pua configuration data in the device with the exception of calibration data is cleared This includes Device and block tags Block parameters e The function block schedule Link object trend object and VCR configurations The network schedule This requires you reconfigure the block tags and the control system and then download the configuration FBAP file to the device and other device on the network The device ID may appear differently on the network due to differences between the new a
302. xt page July 2011 ST 3000 FF Installation and Device Reference Guide 93 8 5 Transducer Block Continued Table 36 Transducer Block Parameter Descriptions continued 02 Name Description or Parameter Contents XD DIAG DETAIL t Contains various status indicators relating to calibration the pressure measurement software and the sensor SENSOR RANGE A read only parameter that shows the rated range of the sensor and the engineering units of the defined range SENSOR SN The serial number of the sensor This value is read directly from the sensor When viewed in hexadecimal format it displays the same value as the PROM ID on the device nameplate SENSOR MAX SP tt Contains the maximum allowable sensor static pressure SENSOR MAX OVP tt Contains the maximum sensor over pressure TANK RANGE Contains the upper and lower range of pressure measurement of a tank Used primarily in level applications specifically for the polynomial calculation BLOCK TEST An internal Honeywell test parameter See Section 11 7 and 11 8 for more details PV OVER RNG CTR Accumulation of minutes that device s PV pressure has been above the value of maximum specification limit less 1096 of range Example 800 inH2O 160 inH2O 640 inH2O PV OVER RNG DATE Date and time when PV pressure last passed below the value of maximum specification limit less 1096 of range Example 800 inH2O 160 inH2O 640 inH2O PV UNDER RNG CTR Accumulation of minutes th

Honeywell ST3000 Users manual, 34-ST-25-15

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents